2006 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
FILE DETAILS:
2006 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
Language : English
Pages : 4463
Downloadable : Yes
File Type : PDF
IMAGES PREVIEW OF THE MANUAL:
DESCRIPTION:
2006 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
FOREWORD:
- This manual contains maintenance and repair procedure for the 2006 INFINITI FX35/FX45.
- In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle, this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting any repair task.
- All information in this manual is based on the latest product information at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice.
PRECAUTIONS:
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT
BELT PRE-TENSIONER” NBS004IP
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the SRS and SB section of this Service Manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS:
2006 Infiniti FX35 FX45 S50 Series Service Manual – PDF DOWNLOAD
fwd............................................................................................................................. 1 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 1 FOREWORD.................................................................................................................... 2 QUICK REFERENCE CHART....................................................................................................... 3 A: GENERAL INFORMATION...................................................................................................... 0 GI - General Information................................................................................................ 0 B: ENGINE................................................................................................................... 0 EM - Engine Mechanical.................................................................................................. 0 LU - Engine Lubrication System.......................................................................................... 0 CO - Engine Cooling System.............................................................................................. 0 EC - Engine Control System.............................................................................................. 0 FL - Fuel System........................................................................................................ 0 EX - Exhaust System..................................................................................................... 0 ACC - Accelerator Control System........................................................................................ 0 C: TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE................................................................................................... 0 AT - Automatic Transmission............................................................................................. 0 D: DRIVELINE/AXLE........................................................................................................... 0 TF - Transfer........................................................................................................... 0 PR - Propeller Shaft.................................................................................................... 0 FFD - Front Final Drive................................................................................................. 0 RFD - Rear Final Drive.................................................................................................. 0 FAX - Front Axle........................................................................................................ 0 RAX - Rear Axle......................................................................................................... 0 E: SUSPENSION............................................................................................................... 0 FSU - Front Suspension.................................................................................................. 0 RSU - Rear Suspension................................................................................................... 0 WT - Road Wheels & Tires................................................................................................ 0 F: BRAKES................................................................................................................... 0 BR - Brake System....................................................................................................... 0 PB - Parking Brake System............................................................................................... 0 BRC - Brake Control System.............................................................................................. 0 G: STEERING................................................................................................................. 0 PS - Power Steering System.............................................................................................. 0 H: RESTRAINTS............................................................................................................... 0 SB - Seat Belts......................................................................................................... 0 SRS - Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)............................................................................... 0 I: BODY..................................................................................................................... 0 BL - Body, Lock & Security System....................................................................................... 0 GW - Glasses, Window System & Mirrors................................................................................... 0 RF - Roof............................................................................................................... 0 EI - Exterior & Interior................................................................................................ 0 IP - Instrument Panel................................................................................................... 0 SE - Seat............................................................................................................... 0 J: AIR CONDITIONER.......................................................................................................... 0 ATC - Automatic Air Conditioner......................................................................................... 0 K: ELECTRICAL............................................................................................................... 0 SC - Starting & Charging System......................................................................................... 0 LT - Lighting System.................................................................................................... 0 DI - Driver Information System.......................................................................................... 0 WW - Wiper, Washer & Horn............................................................................................... 0 BCS - Body Control System............................................................................................... 0 LAN - LAN System........................................................................................................ 0 AV - Audio Visual, Navigation & Telephone System........................................................................ 0 ACS - Auto Cruise Control System........................................................................................ 0 PG - Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements............................................................................ 0 L: MAINTENANCE.............................................................................................................. 0 MA - Maintenance........................................................................................................ 0 M: INDEX.................................................................................................................... 1 IDX - Alphabetical Index................................................................................................ 1 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT................................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS............................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)............................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)............................................................................................. 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX............................................................................................ 81 acc............................................................................................................................. 6 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 6 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 7 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 7 ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM.............................................................................................. 8 Components.......................................................................................................... 8 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 8 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 8 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 8 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION................................................................................... 8 acs............................................................................................................................. 10 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 10 ASCD.................................................................................................................... 12 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)............................................................................... 12 Description..................................................................................................... 12 ICC..................................................................................................................... 13 PRECAUTIONS......................................................................................................... 13 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”..................... 13 Precautions for ICC System Service.............................................................................. 13 PREPARATION......................................................................................................... 14 Special Service Tools........................................................................................... 14 DESCRIPTION......................................................................................................... 15 Outline......................................................................................................... 15 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE.................................................................... 15 CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE.............................................................. 15 BRAKE ASSIST (WITH PREVIEW FUNCTION)........................................................................ 15 Functional Diagram.............................................................................................. 16 Components Description.......................................................................................... 18 CAN Communication............................................................................................... 18 CAN COMMUNICATION UNIT...................................................................................... 18 Switch Operation................................................................................................ 19 ICC System Display.............................................................................................. 19 ACTION TEST......................................................................................................... 20 ICC System Running Test......................................................................................... 20 VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCE CONTROL MODE.................................................................... 20 Set Checking............................................................................................ 20 Check For Increase Of Cruising Speed.................................................................... 20 Check For Decrease Of Cruising Speed.................................................................... 20 Check For Cancellation Of Vehicle-To-Vehicle Distance Control Mode (Normal Driving Condition) In ....... 20 Check For Restoring Speed That Is Set By Vehicle-To-Vehicle Distance Control Mode Before Cancella....... 20 Check For MAIN Switch................................................................................... 20 Check For RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, CANCEL Switches................................................. 21 Check For Distance Switch............................................................................... 21 CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL MODE.............................................................. 21 Set Checking............................................................................................ 21 Check For Increase Of Cruising Speed.................................................................... 22 Check For Decrease Of Cruising Speed.................................................................... 22 Check For Cancellation Of Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode (Normal Driving Conditio....... 22 Check For Restoring Speed That Is Set By Conventional (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode Before IC....... 22 Check For MAIN Switch................................................................................... 22 Check For RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST, CANCEL Switches................................................. 22 LASER BEAM AIMING ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................ 23 Outline......................................................................................................... 23 Preparation..................................................................................................... 23 Outline of Adjustment Procedure................................................................................. 23 Setting the ICC Target Board.................................................................................... 23 ADJUSTING HEIGHT OF THE TARGET.............................................................................. 23 ADJUSTING THE RIGHT-LEFT POSITION OF THE TARGET............................................................. 24 SETTING THE TARGET.......................................................................................... 24 Aiming Adjustment............................................................................................... 26 CHECK AFTER THE ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................. 27 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION........................................................................................... 28 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location.................................................................. 28 WIRING DIAGRAM...................................................................................................... 29 Schematic....................................................................................................... 29 Wiring Diagram — ICC —.......................................................................................... 30 TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE....................................................................................... 37 Terminals and Reference Value for ICC Unit...................................................................... 37 Terminals and Reference Value for ICC Sensor.................................................................... 38 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................. 39 Work Flow....................................................................................................... 39 CONSULT-II Function (ICC)....................................................................................... 40 DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 40 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION.................................................................................. 40 WORK SUPPORT................................................................................................ 41 Work Item............................................................................................... 41 Cause of Auto-Cancel.................................................................................... 41 Laser Beam Adjust....................................................................................... 41 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS..................................................................................... 41 DATA MONITOR................................................................................................ 42 Operation Procedure..................................................................................... 42 Monitored Item.......................................................................................... 42 ACTIVE TEST................................................................................................. 44 ICC BUZZER 1............................................................................................ 44 METER LAMP.............................................................................................. 44 STOP LAMP............................................................................................... 44 BOOSTER SOL/V 3......................................................................................... 45 Self-Diagnostic Function........................................................................................ 46 WITH CONSULT-II............................................................................................. 46 WITHOUT CONSULT-II.......................................................................................... 46 Self-Diagnostic Erasing Method.......................................................................... 47 SELF-DIAGNOSIS BY ICC SYSTEM DISPLAY WILL NOT RUN........................................................... 48 Possible Irregular Condition............................................................................ 48 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS......................................................................... 51 Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart............................................................................. 51 DTC 11 CONTROL UNIT............................................................................................. 53 DTC 20 CAN COMM CIRCUIT......................................................................................... 53 DTC 31 POWER SUPPLY CIR, DTC 34 POWER SUPPLY CIR 2.............................................................. 53 DTC 41 VHCL SPEED SE CIRC....................................................................................... 54 DTC 43 ABS/TCS/VDC CIRC......................................................................................... 55 DTC 45 BRAKE SW/STOP L SW....................................................................................... 55 DTC 46 OPERATION SW CIRC........................................................................................ 57 DTC 61 PRESS SEN CIRCUIT........................................................................................ 59 DTC 62 BOOSTER SOL/V CIRCUIT.................................................................................... 60 DTC 63 RELEASE SW CIRCUIT....................................................................................... 61 DTC 65 PRESSURE CONTROL......................................................................................... 63 DTC 74 LASER BEAM OFF CNTR...................................................................................... 64 DTC 90 STOP LAMP RLY FIX........................................................................................ 64 DTC 92 ECM CIRCUIT.............................................................................................. 70 DTC 96 NP RANGE................................................................................................. 71 DTC 97 AT CIRCUIT............................................................................................... 73 DTC 98 GEAR POSITION............................................................................................ 73 DTC 102 RADAR STAIN............................................................................................. 74 DTC 103 LASER SENSOR FAIL....................................................................................... 74 DTC 104 LASER AIMING INCMP...................................................................................... 75 DTC 107 LASER COMM FAIL......................................................................................... 75 DTC 109 LASER HIGH TEMP......................................................................................... 75 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS...................................................................................... 76 Symptom Chart................................................................................................... 76 Symptom 1: MAIN Switch Does Not Turn ON......................................................................... 77 Symptom 2: ICC System Cannot Be Set (MAIN Switch Turns ON/OFF).................................................. 77 Symptom 3: ICC System Cannot Be Operated by CANCEL Switch, RESUME/ ACCELERATE Switch or DISTANCE ............... 78 Symptom 4: ICC System Is Not Cancelled When the A/T Selector Lever Is in Other Than “D” and “M” P............... 79 Symptom 5: Chime Does Not Sound................................................................................. 79 Symptom 6: Driving Force Is Hunting............................................................................. 80 Symptom 7: ICC System Frequently Cannot Detect the Vehicle Ahead/ Detection Zone Is Short....................... 80 Symptom 8: The System Does Not Detect the Vehicle Ahead at All.................................................. 81 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT INSPECTION..................................................................................... 82 ICC Steering Switch............................................................................................. 82 Booster Solenoid................................................................................................ 82 Release Switch.................................................................................................. 82 ICC Brake Switch and Stop Lamp Switch........................................................................... 83 ICC Brake Hold Relay............................................................................................ 83 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION............................................................................................ 84 ICC Unit........................................................................................................ 84 REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 84 INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 84 ICC Sensor...................................................................................................... 84 REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 84 INSTALLATION................................................................................................ 85 ICC Steering Switch............................................................................................. 85 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 at.............................................................................................................................. 86 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 86 INDEX FOR DTC........................................................................................................... 90 Alphabetical Index.................................................................................................. 90 DTC No. Index....................................................................................................... 91 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 92 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 92 Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of A/T and Engine.................................................. 92 Precautions......................................................................................................... 93 Service Notice or Precautions....................................................................................... 94 ATF COOLER SERVICE.............................................................................................. 94 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS........................................................................................... 94 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 95 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 95 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 96 A/T FLUID............................................................................................................... 97 Changing A/T Fluid.................................................................................................. 97 Checking A/T Fluid.................................................................................................. 98 A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning........................................................................................... 100 A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE............................................................................. 100 A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE............................................................................ 101 A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................... 102 A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION............................................................................... 102 A/T CONTROL SYSTEM...................................................................................................... 103 Cross-sectional View (2WD Models)................................................................................... 103 Cross-sectional View (VQ35DE Models for AWD)........................................................................ 104 Cross-sectional View (VK45DE Models for AWD)........................................................................ 105 Shift Mechanism..................................................................................................... 106 CONSTRUCTION.................................................................................................... 106 FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE.................................................................................... 106 CLUTCH AND BAND CHART........................................................................................... 107 POWER TRANSMISSION.............................................................................................. 108 “N” Position................................................................................................ 108 “P” Position................................................................................................ 108 “D1” Position............................................................................................... 109 “M1” Position............................................................................................... 110 “D2” Position............................................................................................... 111 “M2” Position............................................................................................... 112 “D3” and “M3” Positions..................................................................................... 113 “D4” and “M4” Positions..................................................................................... 114 “D5” and “M5” Positions..................................................................................... 115 “R” Position................................................................................................ 116 TCM Function........................................................................................................ 117 CONTROL SYSTEM OUTLINE.......................................................................................... 117 CONTROL SYSTEM DIAGRAM.......................................................................................... 117 CAN Communication................................................................................................... 118 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 118 Input/Output Signal of TCM.......................................................................................... 118 Line Pressure Control............................................................................................... 119 LINE PRESSURE CONTROL IS BASED ON THE TCM LINE PRESSURE CHARACTERISTIC PATTERN.................................. 119 Normal Control.............................................................................................. 119 Back-up Control (Engine Brake).............................................................................. 119 During Shift Change......................................................................................... 120 At Low Fluid Temperature.................................................................................... 120 Shift Control....................................................................................................... 120 SHIFT CHANGE.................................................................................................... 120 Shift Change System Diagram................................................................................. 121 BLIPPING CONTROL................................................................................................ 121 Shift Change System Diagram................................................................................. 121 Lock-up Control..................................................................................................... 122 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE CONTROL................................................................... 122 Lock-up Control System Diagram.............................................................................. 122 Lock-up Released............................................................................................ 122 Lock-up Applied............................................................................................. 122 SMOOTH LOCK-UP CONTROL.......................................................................................... 122 Half-clutched State......................................................................................... 122 Slip Lock-up Control........................................................................................ 122 Engine Brake Control................................................................................................ 123 Control Valve....................................................................................................... 123 FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE....................................................................................... 123 FUNCTION OF ATF PRESSURE SWITCH................................................................................. 124 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM........................................................................................ 125 Introduction........................................................................................................ 125 OBD-II Function for A/T System...................................................................................... 125 One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II........................................................................... 125 ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC........................................................................................ 125 TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC........................................................................................ 125 OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)................................................................................ 125 HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC................................................................................ 125 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data............................................................ 126 HOW TO ERASE DTC................................................................................................ 126 HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT-II).............................................................................. 127 HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST)..................................................................................... 128 HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS)..................................................................................... 128 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).................................................................................... 128 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 128 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS....................................................................................................... 129 DTC Inspection Priority Chart....................................................................................... 129 Fail-safe........................................................................................................... 129 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 129 Vehicle Speed Sensor........................................................................................ 129 Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor........................................................................... 129 Throttle Position Sensor.................................................................................... 129 PNP Switch.................................................................................................. 129 Starter Relay............................................................................................... 129 A/T Interlock............................................................................................... 130 A/T 1st Engine Braking...................................................................................... 130 Line Pressure Solenoid...................................................................................... 130 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid............................................................................ 130 Low Coast Brake Solenoid.................................................................................... 130 Input Clutch Solenoid....................................................................................... 130 Direct Clutch Solenoid...................................................................................... 130 Front Brake Solenoid........................................................................................ 130 High and Low Reverse Clutch Solenoid........................................................................ 130 Turbine Revolution Sensor 1 or 2............................................................................ 130 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair...................................................... 131 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................... 131 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 132 Work Flow Chart............................................................................................. 132 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET............................................................................................ 133 Information from Customer................................................................................... 133 Diagnostic Worksheet Chart.................................................................................. 133 A/T Electrical Parts Location....................................................................................... 136 Circuit Diagram..................................................................................................... 137 Inspections Before Trouble Diagnosis................................................................................ 138 A/T CHECK....................................................................................................... 138 A/T Fluid Leakage and A/T Fluid Level Check................................................................. 138 A/T Fluid Condition Check................................................................................... 138 STALL TEST...................................................................................................... 138 Stall Test Procedure........................................................................................ 138 Judgement of Stall Test..................................................................................... 139 LINE PRESSURE TEST.............................................................................................. 139 Line Pressure Test Port..................................................................................... 139 Line Pressure Test Procedure................................................................................ 139 Line Pressure............................................................................................... 140 Judgement of Line Pressure Test............................................................................. 141 ROAD TEST....................................................................................................... 141 Description................................................................................................. 141 Check Before Engine Is Started...................................................................................... 142 Check at Idle....................................................................................................... 142 Cruise Test - Part 1................................................................................................ 143 Cruise Test - Part 2................................................................................................ 145 Cruise Test - Part 3................................................................................................ 146 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs......................................................................... 147 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 147 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 147 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases...................................................................... 148 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 148 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 148 Symptom Chart....................................................................................................... 149 TCM Input/Output Signal Reference Values............................................................................ 174 A/T ASSEMBLY HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT.................................................................. 174 TCM INSPECTION TABLE............................................................................................ 174 CONSULT-II Function (A/T)........................................................................................... 175 FUNCTION........................................................................................................ 175 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE...................................................................................... 175 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE.................................................................................... 177 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT MODE..................................................................................... 177 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 177 Display Items List.......................................................................................... 177 How to Erase Self-Diagnostic Results........................................................................ 180 DATA MONITOR MODE............................................................................................... 180 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 180 Display Items List.......................................................................................... 180 CAN DIAGNOSTIC SUPPORT MONITOR MODE............................................................................. 184 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 184 DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE........................................................................................... 184 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 184 Display Items List.......................................................................................... 186 Diagnostic Procedure without CONSULT-II............................................................................. 187 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH GST)..................................................................... 187 OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)..................................................................... 187 TCM SEL......................................................................................................... 187 Description................................................................................................. 187 Diagnostic Procedure........................................................................................ 187 Judgement Self-diagnosis Code............................................................................... 188 Erase Self-diagnosis........................................................................................ 188 DTC U1000 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE........................................................................................ 189 Description......................................................................................................... 189 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 189 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 189 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 189 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 189 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 189 Wiring Diagram — AT — CAN........................................................................................... 190 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 191 DTC P0615 START SIGNAL CIRCUIT.......................................................................................... 192 Description......................................................................................................... 192 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 192 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 192 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 192 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 192 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 192 Wiring Diagram — AT — STSIG......................................................................................... 193 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 194 DTC P0700 TCM........................................................................................................... 196 Description......................................................................................................... 196 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 196 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 196 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 196 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 196 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 196 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 196 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH.................................................................................. 197 Description......................................................................................................... 197 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 197 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 197 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 197 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 197 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 197 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 197 Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW........................................................................................ 198 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 199 DTC P0717 TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR..................................................................................... 201 Description......................................................................................................... 201 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 201 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 201 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 201 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 201 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 201 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 201 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 202 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR).................................................................. 203 Description......................................................................................................... 203 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 203 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 203 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 203 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 203 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 203 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 204 Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T........................................................................................ 205 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 206 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL........................................................................................... 208 Description......................................................................................................... 208 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 208 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 208 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 208 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 208 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 208 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 209 DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE........................................................................ 210 Description......................................................................................................... 210 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 210 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 210 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 210 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 210 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 210 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 210 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 211 DTC P0744 A/T TCC S/V FUNCTION (LOCK-UP)................................................................................ 212 Description......................................................................................................... 212 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 212 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 212 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 212 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 212 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 212 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 212 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 213 DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................. 214 Description......................................................................................................... 214 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 214 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 214 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 214 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 214 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 214 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 214 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 215 DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR...................................................................................... 216 Description......................................................................................................... 216 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 216 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 216 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 216 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 216 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 216 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 217 DTC P1710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT.......................................................................... 219 Description......................................................................................................... 219 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 219 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 219 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 219 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 219 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 219 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 219 Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS........................................................................................... 220 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 221 Component Inspection................................................................................................ 223 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1.................................................................................. 223 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2.................................................................................. 223 DTC P1721 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR MTR...................................................................................... 224 Description......................................................................................................... 224 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 224 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 224 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 224 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 224 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 224 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 225 DTC P1730 A/T INTERLOCK................................................................................................. 226 Description......................................................................................................... 226 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 226 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 226 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 226 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 226 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 226 Judgement of A/T Interlock.......................................................................................... 226 A/T INTERLOCK COUPLING PATTERN TABLE............................................................................ 227 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 227 DTC P1731 A/T 1ST ENGINE BRAKING........................................................................................ 229 Description......................................................................................................... 229 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 229 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 229 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 229 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 229 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 229 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 230 DTC P1752 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE................................................................................... 231 Description......................................................................................................... 231 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 231 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 231 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 231 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 231 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 231 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 231 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 232 DTC P1754 INPUT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION.......................................................................... 233 Description......................................................................................................... 233 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 233 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 233 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 233 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 233 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 233 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 234 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 234 DTC P1757 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................... 235 Description......................................................................................................... 235 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 235 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 235 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 235 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 235 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 235 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 235 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 236 DTC P1759 FRONT BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION........................................................................... 237 Description......................................................................................................... 237 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 237 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 237 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 237 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 237 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 237 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 238 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 238 DTC P1762 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................. 239 Description......................................................................................................... 239 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 239 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 239 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 239 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 239 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 239 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 239 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 240 DTC P1764 DIRECT CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION......................................................................... 241 Description......................................................................................................... 241 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 241 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 241 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 241 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 241 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 241 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 242 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 242 DTC P1767 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................... 243 Description......................................................................................................... 243 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 243 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 243 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 243 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 243 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 243 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 243 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 244 DTC P1769 HIGH AND LOW REVERSE CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION........................................................... 245 Description......................................................................................................... 245 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 245 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 245 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 245 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 245 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 245 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 246 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 246 DTC P1772 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE................................................................................ 247 Description......................................................................................................... 247 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 247 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 247 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 247 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 247 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 247 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 247 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 248 DTC P1774 LOW COAST BRAKE SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION....................................................................... 249 Description......................................................................................................... 249 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 249 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 249 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 249 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 249 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 249 WITH GST........................................................................................................ 249 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 250 DTC P1815 MANUAL MODE SWITCH............................................................................................ 251 Description......................................................................................................... 251 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode..................................................................... 251 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 251 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 251 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 251 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 251 Wiring Diagram — AT — MMSW.......................................................................................... 252 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 254 Component Inspection................................................................................................ 255 MANUAL MODE SWITCH.............................................................................................. 255 DTC P1841 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 1......................................................................................... 256 Description......................................................................................................... 256 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 256 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 256 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 256 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 256 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 256 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 257 DTC P1843 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 3......................................................................................... 258 Description......................................................................................................... 258 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 258 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 258 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 258 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 258 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 258 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 259 DTC P1845 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 5......................................................................................... 260 Description......................................................................................................... 260 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 260 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 260 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 260 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 260 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 260 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 261 DTC P1846 ATF PRESSURE SWITCH 6......................................................................................... 262 Description......................................................................................................... 262 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 262 On Board Diagnosis Logic............................................................................................ 262 Possible Cause...................................................................................................... 262 DTC Confirmation Procedure.......................................................................................... 262 WITH CONSULT-II................................................................................................. 262 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 263 MAIN POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.................................................................................... 264 Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN.......................................................................................... 264 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 265 CLOSED THROTTLE POSITION AND WIDE OPEN THROTTLE POSITION CIRCUIT........................................................ 268 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 268 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 268 BRAKE SIGNAL CIRCUIT.................................................................................................... 269 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 269 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 269 A/T INDICATOR CIRCUIT................................................................................................... 270 Description......................................................................................................... 270 CONSULT-II Reference Value.......................................................................................... 270 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 270 A/T INDICATOR SYMPTOM CHART..................................................................................... 270 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS.......................................................................................... 271 Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC........................................................................................ 271 A/T CHECK Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On........................................................................... 274 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 274 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 274 Engine Cannot Be Started in “P” or “N” Position..................................................................... 275 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 275 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 275 In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves When Pushed.......................................................................... 276 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 276 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 276 In “N” Position, Vehicle Moves...................................................................................... 277 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 277 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 277 Large Shock (“N” to “D” Position)................................................................................... 278 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 278 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 278 Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward in “R” Position..................................................................... 281 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 281 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 281 Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward in “D” Position...................................................................... 284 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 284 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 284 Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1................................................................................... 286 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 286 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 286 A/T Does Not Shift: D1 -> D2........................................................................................ 289 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 289 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 289 A/T Does Not Shift: D2 -> D3........................................................................................ 291 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 291 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 291 A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> D4........................................................................................ 293 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 293 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 293 A/T Does Not Shift: D4 -> D5........................................................................................ 296 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 296 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 296 A/T Does Not Lock-up................................................................................................ 298 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 298 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 298 A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition................................................................................. 300 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 300 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 300 Lock-up Is Not Released............................................................................................. 302 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 302 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 302 Engine Speed Does Not Return to Idle................................................................................ 302 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 302 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 302 Cannot Be Changed to Manual Mode.................................................................................... 304 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 304 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 304 A/T Does Not Shift: 5th Gear -> 4th Gear............................................................................ 304 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 304 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 304 A/T Does Not Shift: 4th Gear -> 3rd Gear............................................................................ 306 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 306 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 306 A/T Does Not Shift: 3rd Gear -> 2nd Gear............................................................................ 308 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 308 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 308 A/T Does Not Shift: 2nd Gear -> 1st Gear............................................................................ 310 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 310 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 310 Vehicle Does Not Decelerate by Engine Brake......................................................................... 312 SYMPTOM:........................................................................................................ 312 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................ 312 SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 314 Control Device Removal and Installation............................................................................. 314 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 315 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 315 Control Rod Removal and Installation................................................................................ 315 CONTROL ROD COMPONENTS.......................................................................................... 315 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 316 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 316 Adjustment of A/T Position.......................................................................................... 316 Checking of A/T Position............................................................................................ 316 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM................................................................................................... 317 Description......................................................................................................... 317 Shift Lock System Electrical Parts Location......................................................................... 317 Wiring Diagram — AT — SHIFT......................................................................................... 318 Diagnostic Procedure................................................................................................ 319 KEY INTERLOCK CABLE..................................................................................................... 321 Components.......................................................................................................... 321 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 322 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 322 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 323 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE...................................................................................................... 324 Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2........................................................... 324 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 324 CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM ASSEMBLY REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................ 324 Removal..................................................................................................... 324 Installation................................................................................................ 328 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................... 332 Removal..................................................................................................... 332 Installation................................................................................................ 334 Parking Components (2WD Models Only)................................................................................ 336 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 336 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 336 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 339 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 340 Rear Oil Seal....................................................................................................... 343 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 343 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 343 Revolution Sensor Components (2WD Models Only)...................................................................... 344 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 344 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 344 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 347 AIR BREATHER HOSE....................................................................................................... 349 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 349 VQ35DE ENGINE MODEL............................................................................................. 349 VK45DE ENGINE MODEL............................................................................................. 350 TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY................................................................................................... 351 Removal and Installation (2WD Models)............................................................................... 351 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 351 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 351 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 352 Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter............................................................. 352 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 353 Removal and Installation (AWD Models)............................................................................... 354 COMPONENTS (FOR VQ35DE)......................................................................................... 354 COMPONENTS (FOR VK45DE)......................................................................................... 355 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 355 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 357 Installation and Inspection of Torque Converter............................................................. 357 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 357 OVERHAUL................................................................................................................ 359 Components.......................................................................................................... 359 Oil Channel......................................................................................................... 373 Locations of Adjusting Shims, Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings........................................ 376 DISASSEMBLY............................................................................................................. 379 Disassembly......................................................................................................... 379 REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS.............................................................................................. 397 Oil Pump............................................................................................................ 397 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 397 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 397 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 398 Front Sun Gear, 3rd One-way Clutch.................................................................................. 400 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 400 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 400 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 401 3rd One-way Clutch.......................................................................................... 401 Front Sun Gear Snap Ring.................................................................................... 401 Front Sun Gear.............................................................................................. 401 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 401 Front Carrier, Input Clutch, Rear Internal Gear..................................................................... 402 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 402 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 404 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 405 Front Carrier Snap Ring..................................................................................... 405 Input Clutch Snap Ring...................................................................................... 405 Input Clutch Drum........................................................................................... 405 Input Clutch Drive Plates................................................................................... 405 Input Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates............................................................. 405 Front Carrier............................................................................................... 406 Rear Internal Gear.......................................................................................... 406 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 406 Mid Sun Gear, Rear Sun Gear, High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub........................................................ 408 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 408 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 409 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 411 High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub Snap Ring, Rear Sun Gear Snap Ring.......................................... 411 1st One-way Clutch.......................................................................................... 411 Mid Sun Gear................................................................................................ 411 Rear Sun Gear............................................................................................... 411 High and Low Reverse Clutch Hub............................................................................. 411 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 411 High and Low Reverse Clutch......................................................................................... 414 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 414 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 415 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 415 High and Low Reverse Clutch Snap Ring....................................................................... 415 High and Low Reverse Clutch Drive Plates.................................................................... 415 High and Low Reverse Clutch Retaining Plates and Driven Plates.............................................. 415 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 415 Direct Clutch....................................................................................................... 417 COMPONENTS...................................................................................................... 417 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 418 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 418 Direct Clutch Snap Ring..................................................................................... 418 Direct Clutch Drive Plates.................................................................................. 418 Direct Clutch Retaining Plates, Driven Plates and DIsh Plate*............................................... 418 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 418 ASSEMBLY................................................................................................................ 420 Assembly (1)........................................................................................................ 420 Adjustment.......................................................................................................... 434 TOTAL END PLAY.................................................................................................. 434 Assembly (2)........................................................................................................ 437 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)................................................................................... 444 General Specifications.............................................................................................. 444 Vehicle Speed at Which Gear Shifting Occurs......................................................................... 444 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 444 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 444 Vehicle Speed at Which Lock-up Occurs/Releases...................................................................... 445 2WD MODELS...................................................................................................... 445 AWD MODELS...................................................................................................... 445 Stall Speed......................................................................................................... 445 Line Pressure....................................................................................................... 445 A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor........................................................................................ 445 Turbine Revolution Sensor........................................................................................... 446 Vehicle Speed Sensor A/T (Revolution Sensor)........................................................................ 446 Reverse Brake....................................................................................................... 446 Total End Play...................................................................................................... 446 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 atc............................................................................................................................. 448 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 448 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 452 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 452 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect.......................................... 452 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 452 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover................................................................... 453 Precautions for Working with HFC-134a (R-134a)...................................................................... 453 CONTAMINATED REFRIGERANT........................................................................................ 454 General Refrigerant Precautions..................................................................................... 454 Precautions for Refrigerant Connection.............................................................................. 455 ABOUT ONE-TOUCH JOINT........................................................................................... 455 Description................................................................................................. 455 FEATURES OF NEW TYPE REFRIGERANT CONNECTION..................................................................... 457 O-RING AND REFRIGERANT CONNECTION............................................................................... 458 VQ35DE...................................................................................................... 458 VK45DE...................................................................................................... 458 O-Ring Part Numbers and Specifications...................................................................... 459 Precautions for Servicing Compressor................................................................................ 460 Precautions for Service Equipment................................................................................... 460 RECOVERY/RECYCLING EQUIPMENT.................................................................................... 460 ELECTRICAL LEAK DETECTOR........................................................................................ 460 VACUUM PUMP..................................................................................................... 461 MANIFOLD GAUGE SET.............................................................................................. 461 SERVICE HOSES................................................................................................... 461 SERVICE COUPLERS................................................................................................ 462 REFRIGERANT WEIGHT SCALE........................................................................................ 462 CHARGING CYLINDER............................................................................................... 462 Precautions for Leak Detection Dye.................................................................................. 463 IDENTIFICATION.................................................................................................. 463 IDENTIFICATION LABEL FOR VEHICLE................................................................................ 463 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 464 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 464 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Tools and Equipment....................................................................... 465 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 467 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 468 Refrigerant Cycle................................................................................................... 468 REFRIGERANT FLOW................................................................................................ 468 FREEZE PROTECTION............................................................................................... 468 Refrigerant System Protection....................................................................................... 468 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR..................................................................................... 468 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE........................................................................................... 468 V-6 Variable Displacement Compressor................................................................................ 469 GENERAL INFORMATION............................................................................................. 469 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 470 General..................................................................................................... 470 Operation................................................................................................... 471 Component Layout.................................................................................................... 473 LUBRICANT............................................................................................................... 474 Maintenance of Lubricant Quantity in Compressor..................................................................... 474 LUBRICANT....................................................................................................... 474 LUBRICANT RETURN OPERATION...................................................................................... 474 LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPONENTS REPLACEMENT EXCEPT COMPRESSOR...................................... 475 LUBRICANT ADJUSTING PROCEDURE FOR COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT........................................................ 476 AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL................................................................................................. 477 Description of Air Conditioner LAN Control System................................................................... 477 System Construction................................................................................................. 477 OPERATION....................................................................................................... 477 TRANSMISSION DATA AND TRANSMISSION ORDER........................................................................ 478 Start:...................................................................................................... 478 Address:.................................................................................................... 478 Opening Angle:.............................................................................................. 478 Error Check:................................................................................................ 478 Stop Signal:................................................................................................ 479 AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL (AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL)............................................................ 479 FAN SPEED CONTROL............................................................................................... 479 INTAKE DOOR CONTROL............................................................................................. 479 MODE DOOR CONTROL............................................................................................... 479 MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL........................................................................................... 480 SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM........................................................................................... 480 Description of Control System....................................................................................... 481 Control Operation................................................................................................... 481 DISPLAY SCREEN.................................................................................................. 482 AUTO SWITCH..................................................................................................... 482 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) (DRIVER SIDE)......................................... 482 TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH (POTENTIO TEMPERATURE CONTROL) (PASSENGER SIDE)...................................... 482 INTAKE SWITCH................................................................................................... 482 DEFROSTER (DEF) SWITCH.......................................................................................... 482 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH..................................................................................... 482 OFF SWITCH...................................................................................................... 482 A/C SWITCH...................................................................................................... 482 MODE SWITCH..................................................................................................... 482 FAN SWITCH...................................................................................................... 482 DUAL SWITCH..................................................................................................... 482 Fail-safe Function.................................................................................................. 483 Discharge Air Flow.................................................................................................. 484 System Description.................................................................................................. 485 SWITCHES AND THEIR CONTROL FUNCTION............................................................................. 485 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 486 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS....................................................................................................... 487 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)........................................................................................... 487 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION...................................................................................... 487 DATA MONITOR.................................................................................................... 487 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 487 Display Item List........................................................................................... 487 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair...................................................... 487 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 487 SYMPTOM TABLE................................................................................................... 488 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 489 ENGINE COMPARTMENT.............................................................................................. 489 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT........................................................................................... 490 Schematic........................................................................................................... 491 Wiring Diagram — A/C —.............................................................................................. 492 Auto Amp. Terminals and Reference Value............................................................................. 497 PIN CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUT................................................................................... 497 TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FOR UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP..................................................... 497 Self-diagnosis Function............................................................................................. 499 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 499 FUNCTION CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 500 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: TEMPERATURE SETTING TRIMMER................................................................ 505 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: FOOT POSITION SETTING TRIMMER.............................................................. 506 AUXILIARY MECHANISM: INLET PORT MEMORY FUNCTION................................................................. 506 Operational Check................................................................................................... 507 CHECKING MEMORY FUNCTION........................................................................................ 507 CHECKING BLOWER................................................................................................. 507 CHECKING DISCHARGE AIR.......................................................................................... 507 CHECKING INTAKE AIR............................................................................................. 507 CHECKING TEMPERATURE DECREASE................................................................................... 507 CHECKING TEMPERATURE INCREASE................................................................................... 507 CHECKING A/C SWITCH............................................................................................. 508 CHECKING AUTO MODE.............................................................................................. 508 Power Supply and Ground Circuit for Auto Amp........................................................................ 509 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 509 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 509 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. (Automatic Amplifier)............................................................ 509 Potentio Temperature Control (PTC).......................................................................... 510 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR A/C SYSTEM.............................................................................. 510 LAN System Circuit.................................................................................................. 511 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR LAN CIRCUIT............................................................................. 511 Mode Door Motor Circuit............................................................................................. 515 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 515 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 516 Component Parts............................................................................................. 516 System Operation............................................................................................ 516 Mode Door Control Specification............................................................................. 517 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 517 Mode Door Motor............................................................................................. 517 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR......................................................................... 517 Air Mix Door Motor Circuit.......................................................................................... 518 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 518 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 519 Component Parts............................................................................................. 519 System Operation............................................................................................ 519 Air Mix Door Control Specification.......................................................................... 519 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 520 Air Mix Door Motor.......................................................................................... 520 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR...................................................................... 520 Air Mix Door Motor PBR Circuit...................................................................................... 520 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR PBR.................................................................. 520 Intake Door Motor Circuit........................................................................................... 521 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 521 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 522 Component Parts............................................................................................. 522 System Operation............................................................................................ 522 Intake Door Control Specification........................................................................... 522 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 523 Intake Door Motor........................................................................................... 523 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR....................................................................... 523 Blower Motor Circuit................................................................................................ 524 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 524 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 525 Component Parts............................................................................................. 525 System Operation............................................................................................ 525 Automatic Mode.............................................................................................. 525 Starting Fan Speed Control.................................................................................. 526 Blower Speed Compensation................................................................................... 526 Fan Speed Control Specification............................................................................. 526 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 526 Brush-Less Motor............................................................................................ 526 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR............................................................................ 526 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 528 Blower Motor................................................................................................ 528 Magnet Clutch Circuit............................................................................................... 529 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 529 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................. 530 Low Temperature Protection Control.......................................................................... 530 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH........................................................................... 530 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 536 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor................................................................................. 536 Insufficient Cooling................................................................................................ 537 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 537 PERFORMANCE TEST DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................... 539 PERFORMANCE CHART............................................................................................... 541 Test Condition.............................................................................................. 541 Test Reading................................................................................................ 541 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR UNUSUAL PRESSURE.......................................................................... 542 Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too High.............................................................. 542 High-pressure Side is Too High and Low-pressure Side is Too Low............................................. 542 High-pressure Side is Too Low and Low-pressure Side is Too High............................................. 543 Both High- and Low-pressure Sides are Too Low............................................................... 543 Low-pressure Side Sometimes Becomes Negative................................................................ 544 Low-pressure Side Becomes Negative.......................................................................... 544 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INSUFFICIENT COOLING.................................................................... 544 Insufficient Heating................................................................................................ 546 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 546 Noise............................................................................................................... 547 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 547 Self-diagnosis...................................................................................................... 548 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 548 Memory Function..................................................................................................... 549 INSPECTION FLOW................................................................................................. 549 Ambient Sensor Circuit.............................................................................................. 550 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 550 Ambient Sensor.............................................................................................. 550 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS............................................................................... 550 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR.......................................................................... 550 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 552 Ambient Sensor.............................................................................................. 552 In-vehicle Sensor Circuit........................................................................................... 553 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 553 In-vehicle Sensor........................................................................................... 553 Aspirator................................................................................................... 553 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR....................................................................... 554 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 555 In-vehicle Sensor........................................................................................... 555 Sunload Sensor Circuit.............................................................................................. 556 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 556 Sunload Sensor.............................................................................................. 556 SUNLOAD INPUT PROCESS........................................................................................... 556 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR SUNLOAD SENSOR.......................................................................... 556 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 558 Sunload Sensor.............................................................................................. 558 Intake Sensor Circuit............................................................................................... 559 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION........................................................................................... 559 Intake Sensor............................................................................................... 559 DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR........................................................................... 559 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................ 560 Intake Sensor............................................................................................... 560 CONTROLLER.............................................................................................................. 561 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 561 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 561 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 561 AUTO AMP................................................................................................................ 562 Removal and Installation of Unified Meter and A/C Amp............................................................... 562 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 562 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 562 AMBIENT SENSOR.......................................................................................................... 563 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 563 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 563 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 563 IN-VEHICLE SENSOR....................................................................................................... 564 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 564 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 564 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 564 SUNLOAD SENSOR.......................................................................................................... 565 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 565 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 565 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 565 INTAKE SENSOR........................................................................................................... 566 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 566 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 566 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 566 BLOWER UNIT............................................................................................................. 567 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 567 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 567 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 567 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 568 BLOWER MOTOR............................................................................................................ 569 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 569 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 569 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 569 INTAKE DOOR MOTOR....................................................................................................... 570 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 570 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 570 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 570 IN-CABIN MICROFILTER.................................................................................................... 571 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 571 FUNCTION........................................................................................................ 571 REPLACEMENT TIMING.............................................................................................. 571 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES.......................................................................................... 571 HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................... 572 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 572 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 572 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 573 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 575 MODE DOOR MOTOR......................................................................................................... 577 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 577 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 577 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 577 AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR...................................................................................................... 578 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 578 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 578 Driver Side................................................................................................. 578 Passenger Side.............................................................................................. 578 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 578 HEATER CORE............................................................................................................. 579 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 579 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 579 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 579 DUCTS AND GRILLES....................................................................................................... 580 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 580 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 580 Removal of Center Ventilator Grilles........................................................................ 580 Removal of Side Ventilation................................................................................. 580 Removal of Rear Ventilator Grilles.......................................................................... 580 Removal of Defroster Nozzle, Ducts and Ventilator Ducts..................................................... 581 Removal of Rear Ventilator Ducts............................................................................ 582 Removal of Foot Ducts....................................................................................... 583 Removal of Floor Ducts...................................................................................... 583 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 583 REFRIGERANT LINES....................................................................................................... 584 HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure................................................................................. 584 SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT.......................................................................... 584 Discharging Refrigerant..................................................................................... 584 Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant.................................................................. 584 Components.......................................................................................................... 586 VQ35DE.......................................................................................................... 586 VK45DE.......................................................................................................... 587 Removal and Installation of Compressor.............................................................................. 587 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 587 VQ35DE...................................................................................................... 587 VK45DE...................................................................................................... 588 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 589 Removal and Installation of......................................................................................... 589 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 589 Overhaul.................................................................................................... 589 Inspection.................................................................................................. 591 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 591 Break-in Operation.......................................................................................... 592 Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Flexible Hose.............................................................. 593 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 593 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 594 Removal and Installation of High-pressure Flexible Hose............................................................. 594 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 594 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 595 Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Pipe 1 (Engine Compartment)................................................ 595 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 595 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 596 Removal and Installation of High-pressure Pipe 1 and 2 (Engine Compartment)......................................... 596 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 596 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 597 Removal and Installation of Low-pressure Pipe 2 and High-pressure Pipe 3............................................ 597 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 597 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 599 Removal and Installation of Liquid Tank............................................................................. 599 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 599 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 600 Removal and Installation of Condenser............................................................................... 600 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 600 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 601 Removal and Installation of Refrigerant Pressure Sensor............................................................. 601 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 601 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 601 Removal and Installation of Evaporator.............................................................................. 601 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 601 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 602 Removal and Installation of Expansion Valve......................................................................... 602 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 602 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 602 Checking for Refrigerant Leaks...................................................................................... 603 Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Leak Detector....................................................... 603 Dye Injection....................................................................................................... 603 Electrical Leak Detector............................................................................................ 604 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR.......................................................................... 604 CHECKING PROCEDURE.............................................................................................. 605 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)................................................................................... 607 Compressor.......................................................................................................... 607 Lubricant........................................................................................................... 607 Refrigerant......................................................................................................... 607 Engine Idling Speed................................................................................................. 607 Belt Tension........................................................................................................ 607 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 av.............................................................................................................................. 608 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 608 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 611 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 611 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 612 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 612 AUDIO................................................................................................................... 613 System Description.................................................................................................. 613 AUDIO SYSTEM.................................................................................................... 613 SPEED SENSITIVE VOLUME SYSTEM................................................................................... 614 Component Parts Location............................................................................................ 614 Schematic — AUDIO — / With Navigation System........................................................................ 615 Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — / With Navigation System................................................................... 616 Schematic — AUDIO — Without Navigation System....................................................................... 626 Wiring Diagram — AUDIO — / Without Navigation System................................................................ 627 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit........................................................................ 636 Terminals and Reference Value for BOSE Speaker Amp.................................................................. 638 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 640 Terminals and Reference Value for Woofer............................................................................ 641 Terminals and Reference Value for Satellite Radio Tuner............................................................. 641 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 642 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................ 642 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 642 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................. 642 Trouble Diagnosis................................................................................................... 643 Power Supply Circuit Inspection..................................................................................... 644 Audio Steering Wheel Switch Inspection.............................................................................. 645 A/C and AV Switch Inspection........................................................................................ 647 BOSE Speaker Amp. Inspection........................................................................................ 647 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection..................................................................................... 648 Locking CD Auto-Changer Mechanism................................................................................... 649 DAMPER LOCK PROCEDURE........................................................................................... 649 Removal and Installation of Audio Unit.............................................................................. 650 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 650 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 650 Disassembly and Assembly for Audio Unit............................................................................. 650 DISASSEMBLY..................................................................................................... 650 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................ 650 Removal and Installation for A/C and AV Switch...................................................................... 651 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 651 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 651 Removal and Installation for Front Door Speaker..................................................................... 651 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 651 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 651 Removal and Installation for Rear Door Speaker...................................................................... 651 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 651 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 651 Removal and Installation for Instrument Speaker..................................................................... 652 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 652 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 652 Removal and Installation for Tweeter................................................................................ 652 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 652 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 652 Removal and Installation for Woofer (BOSE System)................................................................... 652 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 652 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 652 Removal and Installation for BOSE Speaker Amp....................................................................... 653 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 653 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 653 Removal and Installation of Satellite Radio Tuner................................................................... 654 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 654 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 654 Removal and Installation of Satellite Radio Antenna................................................................. 654 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 654 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 654 ANTENNA................................................................................................................. 655 System Description.................................................................................................. 655 Wiring Diagram — M/ANT —............................................................................................ 656 Terminals and Reference Value for Audio Unit........................................................................ 657 Antenna Amp. Inspection............................................................................................. 657 Location of Antenna................................................................................................. 658 RADIO ANTENNA AND GPS ANTENNA................................................................................... 658 SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA......................................................................................... 658 Window Antenna Repair............................................................................................... 659 CHECK ELEMENT................................................................................................... 659 Removal and Installation of Roof Antenna............................................................................ 660 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 660 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 660 Removal and Installation of Satellite Radio Antenna................................................................. 660 INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM............................................................................................... 661 System Description.................................................................................................. 661 INTEGRATED DISPLAY SYSTEM....................................................................................... 661 Component Description............................................................................................... 662 DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT............................................................................................ 662 DISPLAY......................................................................................................... 662 A/C AND AV SWITCH............................................................................................... 662 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 662 Component Parts Location............................................................................................ 662 Schematic — INF/D —................................................................................................. 663 Wiring Diagram — INF/D —............................................................................................ 664 Schematic — COMM —.................................................................................................. 670 Wiring Diagram — COMM —............................................................................................. 671 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit.............................................................. 676 Terminals and Reference Value for Display........................................................................... 679 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 681 Special Note for Trouble Diagnosis.................................................................................. 682 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function.................................................................................... 682 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 682 DIAGNOSIS ITEM.................................................................................................. 682 Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)........................................................................................... 683 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 683 SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT........................................................................................... 684 Quick Reference Table....................................................................................... 684 Self-Diagnosis Codes........................................................................................ 685 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode........................................................................................ 686 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 686 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................... 687 VEHICLE SIGNALS................................................................................................. 687 AUTO CLIMATE CONTROL............................................................................................ 688 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR............................................................................................ 688 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 688 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 689 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................ 689 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 689 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................. 689 CAN Communication Check............................................................................................. 690 Unable to Operate System with A/C and AV Switch..................................................................... 691 All Images Are Not Displayed........................................................................................ 693 Tint Is Strange for The RGB Image................................................................................... 695 RGB Image Is Rolling................................................................................................ 697 Values for All Items in The TRIP Screen Do Not Change............................................................... 698 Values for Items, “Driving Distance” and “Average Speed” Do Not Change.............................................. 698 Values for All Items in The FUEL ECONOMY Screen Do Not Change....................................................... 698 Example of Symptoms Possible No Malfunction......................................................................... 699 DISPLAY......................................................................................................... 699 Removal and Installation of Display................................................................................. 699 Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit.................................................................... 699 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 699 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 699 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 699 NAVIGATION SYSTEM....................................................................................................... 700 System Description.................................................................................................. 700 NAVIGATION SYSTEM............................................................................................... 701 Location Detection Principle................................................................................ 701 Map-Matching................................................................................................ 702 GPS (GlobalPositioningSystem)............................................................................. 703 Component Description............................................................................................... 704 NAVI CONTROL UNIT............................................................................................... 704 DVD-ROM Drive............................................................................................... 704 DVD-ROM..................................................................................................... 704 Gyro (Angular Speed Sensor)................................................................................. 704 GPS ANTENNA..................................................................................................... 704 DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT............................................................................................ 704 DISPLAY......................................................................................................... 705 A/C AND AV SWITCH............................................................................................... 705 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 705 Component Parts Location............................................................................................ 705 Schematic — NAVI —.................................................................................................. 706 Wiring Diagram — NAVI —............................................................................................. 707 Schematic — COMM —.................................................................................................. 714 Wiring Diagram — COMM —............................................................................................. 715 Terminals and Reference Value for NAVI Control Unit................................................................. 720 Terminals and Reference Value for Display Control Unit.............................................................. 722 Terminals and Reference Value for Display........................................................................... 726 Terminals and Reference Value for A/C and AV Switch................................................................. 728 Special Note for Trouble Diagnosis.................................................................................. 729 On Board Self-Diagnosis Function.................................................................................... 729 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 729 DIAGNOSIS ITEM.................................................................................................. 729 Self-Diagnosis Mode (DCU)........................................................................................... 730 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 730 SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT........................................................................................... 731 Quick Reference Table....................................................................................... 731 Self-Diagnosis Codes........................................................................................ 732 Self-Diagnosis Mode (NAVI).......................................................................................... 733 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 733 SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT........................................................................................... 735 Quick Reference Table....................................................................................... 735 Confirmation/Adjustment Mode........................................................................................ 736 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 736 DISPLAY DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................... 737 VEHICLE SIGNALS................................................................................................. 737 AUTO CLIMATE CONTROL............................................................................................ 738 NAVIGATION...................................................................................................... 738 Display Diagnosis........................................................................................... 738 Vehicle Signals............................................................................................. 739 Navigation.................................................................................................. 739 Error History............................................................................................... 740 Diagnosis by Error History.................................................................................. 741 Delete Unit Connection Log.................................................................................. 742 CAN DIAG SUPPORT MONITOR............................................................................................ 743 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 743 A/C and AV Switch Self-Diagnosis Function........................................................................... 744 STARTING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................ 744 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 744 EXITING THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE................................................................................. 744 CAN Communication Check............................................................................................. 745 Unable to Operate System with A/C and AV Switch..................................................................... 746 All Images Are Not Displayed........................................................................................ 748 Status Screen for Audio and A/C Is Not Displayed When Showing Map Screen............................................ 750 Vehicle Mark Is Not Displayed Properly.............................................................................. 751 Tint Is Strange for The RGB Image................................................................................... 752 Tint Is Strange for The RGB Image (Only NAVI Screen)................................................................ 754 RGB Image Is Rolling................................................................................................ 756 Values for All Items in The TRIP Screen Do Not Change............................................................... 757 Values for Items, “Driving Distance” and “Average Speed” Do Not Change.............................................. 757 Values for All Items in The FUEL ECONOMY Screen Do Not Change....................................................... 757 Voice Guidance Is Not Heard......................................................................................... 758 Example of Symptoms Possible No Malfunction......................................................................... 759 BASIC OPERATIONS................................................................................................ 759 VEHICLE MARKS................................................................................................... 759 DVD-ROM......................................................................................................... 760 ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE........................................................................... 760 VOICE GUIDANCE.................................................................................................. 761 Removal and Installation of NAVI Control Unit....................................................................... 762 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 762 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 762 Removal and Installation of GPS Antenna............................................................................. 762 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 762 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 762 Removal and Installation of A/C and AV Switch....................................................................... 763 Removal and Installation of Display Unit............................................................................ 763 Removal and Installation of Display Control Unit.................................................................... 763 INFINITI MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM.................................................................................... 764 System Description.................................................................................................. 764 Component Parts Location............................................................................................ 765 Wiring Diagram – MES –.............................................................................................. 766 Terminals and Reference Value for DVD Player........................................................................ 768 Terminals and Reference Value for DVD Display....................................................................... 769 DVD Player Does Not Work............................................................................................ 771 Screen Is Not Shown (While Sounds Come Out of an Audio Speaker, Did Not Do of a Head Phone)......................... 773 Screen Is not Shown (Sounds Come Out of Both an Audio Speaker and a Head Phone)..................................... 774 Head Phone Does Not Sound........................................................................................... 775 Remote Controller Does Not Work..................................................................................... 776 No CD·DVD Sound From All Speakers................................................................................... 777 Removal and Installation for DVD Player............................................................................. 779 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 779 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 779 Removal and Installation for DVD Display Unit....................................................................... 779 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 779 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 780 TELEPHONE............................................................................................................... 781 System Description.................................................................................................. 781 HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM......................................................................................... 781 Component Parts Location............................................................................................ 782 Schematic........................................................................................................... 783 Wiring Diagram — H/PHON —........................................................................................... 784 Terminals and Reference Value for TEL Adapter Unit.................................................................. 789 Self-Diagnosis Function............................................................................................. 790 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 791 Basic Inspection of Hands-Free Phone................................................................................ 793 Audio Steering Wheel Switch Does Not Operate........................................................................ 793 Voice Activated Control Function Does Not Operate................................................................... 795 TEL VOICE GUIDANCE IS HEARD WHEN PRESSING AUDIO STEERING WHEEL SWITCH........................................... 795 TEL VOICE GUIDANCE IS NOT HEARD WHEN PRESSING AUDIO STEERING WHEEL SWITCH....................................... 796 Removal and Installation of TEL Adapter Unit........................................................................ 798 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 798 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 798 Removal and Installation for TEL Antenna............................................................................ 798 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 798 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 798 Removal and Installation of Microphone.............................................................................. 798 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 798 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 798 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 bcs............................................................................................................................. 800 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 800 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 801 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 801 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)............................................................................................... 802 System Description.................................................................................................. 802 BCM FUNCTION.................................................................................................... 802 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION............................................................................. 802 Description................................................................................................. 802 Operation Description....................................................................................... 802 Operation Table Of BCM and Combination Switches............................................................. 803 Sample Operation: (When Lighting Switch 1ST Position Turned ON)............................................. 804 Operation Mode.............................................................................................. 805 CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL....................................................................................... 805 BCM STATUS CONTROL.............................................................................................. 806 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY.............................................................................. 807 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 807 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND COMBINATION METER................................................................. 807 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT.............................................................. 807 MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM............................................................................. 808 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 809 Schematic........................................................................................................... 810 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)........................................................................................... 812 CONSULT–II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 812 ITEMS OF EACH PART.............................................................................................. 812 WORK SUPPORT.................................................................................................... 813 Operation Procedure......................................................................................... 813 Display Item List........................................................................................... 813 CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)...................................................... 813 Removal and Installation of BCM..................................................................................... 814 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 814 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 814 bl.............................................................................................................................. 816 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents........................................................................................................... 816 PRECAUTIONS............................................................................................................. 820 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”......................... 820 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect.......................................... 820 OPERATION PROCEDURE............................................................................................. 820 Precautions for Work................................................................................................ 820 PREPARATION............................................................................................................. 821 Special Service Tools............................................................................................... 821 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................ 821 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS..................................................................................... 822 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 822 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW.............................................................................................. 822 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE.............................................................................. 823 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS................................................................................. 823 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE.................................................................... 823 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................ 823 CONFIRM THE REPAIR.............................................................................................. 824 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting........................................................................... 824 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................ 824 CENTER CONSOLE.................................................................................................. 824 DOORS........................................................................................................... 824 TRUNK........................................................................................................... 825 SUNROOF/HEADLINING.............................................................................................. 825 SEATS........................................................................................................... 825 UNDERHOOD....................................................................................................... 825 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................ 826 HOOD.................................................................................................................... 828 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 828 LONGITUDINAL AND LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT................................................................... 828 FRONT END HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................... 828 SURFACE HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT....................................................................................... 828 Removal and Installation of Hood Assembly........................................................................... 829 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 830 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 830 Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control....................................................................... 830 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 830 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 831 Hood Lock Control Inspection........................................................................................ 831 RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT................................................................................................... 833 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 833 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 833 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 834 FRONT FENDER............................................................................................................ 835 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 835 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 835 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 835 POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM.................................................................................................. 836 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 836 System Description.................................................................................................. 837 OUTLINE......................................................................................................... 838 Functions Available by Operating the Door Lock and Unlock Switches on Driver's Door and Passenger........... 838 Functions Available by Operating the Key Cylinder Switch on Driver's........................................ 838 Select Unlock Operation..................................................................................... 838 Key Reminder Door System.................................................................................... 838 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 839 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 839 Schematic/With Intelligent Key...................................................................................... 840 Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/With Intelligent Key...................................................................... 841 Schematic/Without Intelligent Key................................................................................... 846 Wiring Diagram — D/LOCK —/Without Intelligent Key................................................................... 847 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 851 Terminals and Reference Value for Intelligent Key Unit (With Intelligent Key System)................................ 851 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 852 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)........................................................................................... 852 CONSULT-II START PROCEDURE...................................................................................... 852 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS.................................................................................... 852 Work Support................................................................................................ 852 Data Monitor................................................................................................ 852 Active Test................................................................................................. 853 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 853 Check BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit........................................................................... 854 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 855 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 855 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 857 Check Key Switch.................................................................................................... 859 Check Door Lock and Unlock Switch................................................................................... 861 Check Door Lock Actuator (Driver Side).............................................................................. 863 Check Door Lock Actuator (Passenger Side and Rear LH/RH)............................................................ 864 Check Fuel Lid Lock Actuator........................................................................................ 865 Check Front Door Key Cylinder Switch (Lock)......................................................................... 866 Check Front Door Key Cylinder Switch (Unlock)....................................................................... 867 Check Select Unlock Relay Circuit................................................................................... 868 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM............................................................................................. 869 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 869 System Description.................................................................................................. 870 INPUTS.......................................................................................................... 870 OPERATED PROCEDURE.............................................................................................. 871 Power Door Lock Operation................................................................................... 871 Hazard and Horn Reminder.................................................................................... 871 Auto Door Lock Operation.................................................................................... 871 Panic Alarm Operation....................................................................................... 872 Keyless Power Window Down (Open) Operation.................................................................. 872 Room Lamp and Ignition Key Ring Illumination Operation...................................................... 872 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 872 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 872 Schematic........................................................................................................... 873 Wiring Diagram — KEYLES —........................................................................................... 874 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 877 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 878 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)........................................................................................... 879 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE................................................................................. 879 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEMS.................................................................................... 879 Data Monitor................................................................................................ 879 Active Test................................................................................................. 879 Work Support................................................................................................ 880 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 881 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 882 Check Key Fob Battery and Function.................................................................................. 884 Check ACC Switch.................................................................................................... 885 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 886 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 886 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 888 Check Key Switch.................................................................................................... 890 Check Remote Keyless Entry Receiver................................................................................. 891 Check IPDM E/R Operation............................................................................................ 894 Check Hazard Warning Lamp Function.................................................................................. 895 Check Horn Function................................................................................................. 895 Check Headlamp Function............................................................................................. 895 Check Map Lamp and Ignition Keyhole Illumination Function........................................................... 895 ID Code Entry Procedure............................................................................................. 896 KEY FOB ID SET UP WITH CONSULT-II............................................................................... 896 KEY FOB ID SET UP WITHOUT CONSULT-II............................................................................ 898 Removal and Installation of Remote keyless Entry receiver........................................................... 899 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 899 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 899 Key Fob Battery Replacement......................................................................................... 900 INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM.................................................................................................. 901 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 901 System Description.................................................................................................. 903 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION.............................................................................................. 903 Operation Description....................................................................................... 903 Operation Condition......................................................................................... 904 Auto Door Lock Function..................................................................................... 904 Key Reminder Function....................................................................................... 904 Intelligent Key Lock-in Prevention Function................................................................. 904 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY FUNCTIONS.................................................................................. 904 Door Lock Function.......................................................................................... 904 Map Lamp And Keyhole Illumination Function.................................................................. 905 Panic Alarm Function........................................................................................ 905 Remote Control Power Window Down (Open) Operation........................................................... 905 Key Reminder Function....................................................................................... 905 ENGINE STARTUP FUNCTION......................................................................................... 905 Operation Description....................................................................................... 905 Operation Range............................................................................................. 905 Active Check Function....................................................................................... 906 WARNING AND ALARM FUNCTION...................................................................................... 906 Operation Description....................................................................................... 906 Operation Condition......................................................................................... 906 Warning Procedure........................................................................................... 907 CHANGE SETTINGS FUNCTION........................................................................................ 909 Changing Settings With the Intelligent Key.................................................................. 909 Changing Settings Using CONSULT-II.......................................................................... 909 Changing Settings Using Display Unit........................................................................ 909 INTELLIGENT KEY REGISTRATION.................................................................................... 909 STEERING LOCK UNIT REGISTRATION................................................................................. 909 Steering Lock Unit ID Registration.......................................................................... 909 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 910 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 910 Schematic........................................................................................................... 911 Wiring Diagram — I/KEY —............................................................................................ 913 Terminals and Reference Value for INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT.............................................................. 926 Terminals and Reference Value for Steering Lock unit................................................................ 928 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM............................................................................... 928 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R.......................................................................... 929 Diagnosis Procedure................................................................................................. 930 WORK FLOW....................................................................................................... 930 CONSULT-II Functions (INTELLIGENT KEY).............................................................................. 931 CONSULT-II Start Procedure.......................................................................................... 931 CONSULT-II Application Items........................................................................................ 931 WORK SUPPORT.................................................................................................... 931 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS......................................................................................... 931 DATA MONITOR.................................................................................................... 932 MAIN SIGNALS Display Item................................................................................... 932 ACTIVE TEST..................................................................................................... 932 List of Operation Related Parts..................................................................................... 933 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart..................................................................................... 934 ALL FUNCTIONS OF THE INTELLIGENT KEY ARE NOT OPERATING.......................................................... 934 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY FUNCTION MALFUNCTION....................................................................... 934 DOOR LOCK FUNCTION MALFUNCTION.................................................................................. 935 ENGINE START FUNCTION MALFUNCTION............................................................................... 936 Intelligent Key Operation Inspection........................................................................ 936 Mechanical Key Operation Inspection......................................................................... 936 WARNING CHIME FUNCTION MALFUNCTION.............................................................................. 936 Check CAN Communication System Inspection........................................................................... 939 Check Intelligent Key Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit.......................................................... 939 Check Key Switch (Intelligent Key Unit Input)....................................................................... 940 Check Key Switch (BCM Input)........................................................................................ 941 Check Ignition Knob Switch.......................................................................................... 942 Check Door Switch................................................................................................... 944 CHECK DOOR SWITCH (EXCEPT BACK DOOR SWITCH)..................................................................... 944 CHECK BACK DOOR SWITCH.......................................................................................... 945 Check Unlock Sensor................................................................................................. 946 Check Door Request Switch........................................................................................... 948 Check Intelligent Key Warning Buzzer................................................................................ 949 Check Outside Key Antenna........................................................................................... 950 Check Inside Key Antenna............................................................................................ 953 Check Steering Lock Unit............................................................................................ 954 Check Stop Lamp Switch.............................................................................................. 956 Check Detention Switch.............................................................................................. 957 Check Select Unlock Relay........................................................................................... 959 Check Hazard Function............................................................................................... 960 Check Horn Function................................................................................................. 960 Check Headlamp Function............................................................................................. 960 Check IPDM E/R Operation............................................................................................ 960 Removal and Installation of Intelligent Key Unit.................................................................... 961 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 961 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 961 Intelligent Key Battery Replacement................................................................................. 962 INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY INSPECTION.............................................................................. 962 DOOR.................................................................................................................... 963 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 963 FRONT DOOR...................................................................................................... 963 Longitudinal Clearance and Surface Height Adjustment at Front End........................................... 963 REAR DOOR....................................................................................................... 963 Longitudinal Clearance and Surface Height Adjustment at Front End........................................... 963 STRIKER ADJUSTMENT.............................................................................................. 964 Removal and Installation of Front Door.............................................................................. 964 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 964 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 965 Removal and Installation of Rear Door............................................................................... 965 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 965 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 966 Removal and Installation of Door Weatherstrip....................................................................... 966 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 966 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 966 FRONT DOOR LOCK......................................................................................................... 967 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 967 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 967 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 969 REAR DOOR LOCK.......................................................................................................... 970 Removal and Installation............................................................................................ 970 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 970 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 972 BACK DOOR............................................................................................................... 973 Fitting Adjustment.................................................................................................. 973 VERTICAL/LATERAL CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................... 973 Back Door Assembly.................................................................................................. 973 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 973 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 974 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 974 Removal and Installation of Back Door Striker....................................................................... 974 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 974 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 974 Removal and Installation of Back Door Stay.......................................................................... 975 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 975 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 975 Removal and Installation of Dave Tail Male & Female................................................................. 975 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 975 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 976 Removal and Installation of Back Door Weatherstrip.................................................................. 976 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 976 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 976 BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY................................................................................................. 977 Removal and Installation of Back Door Lock & Closure Assembly....................................................... 977 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 977 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 977 INSPECTION...................................................................................................... 977 Removal and Installation of Back Door Opener Switch................................................................. 977 REMOVAL......................................................................................................... 977 INSTALLATION.................................................................................................... 978 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 978 BACK DOOR LOCK & CLOSURE ASSEMBLY............................................................................... 978 BACK DOOR AUTO CLOSURE SYSTEM........................................................................................... 979 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 979 System Description.................................................................................................. 979 CLOSE OPERATION................................................................................................. 979 NON-OPERATION CONDITION......................................................................................... 979 OPEN OPERATION.................................................................................................. 980 Wiring Diagram — B/CLOS —........................................................................................... 981 Terminals and Reference Value for Back Door Closure Control Unit.................................................... 983 Work Flow........................................................................................................... 984 Preliminary Check................................................................................................... 984 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom.................................................................................. 984 Check Back Door Closure Control Unit Power Supply and Ground Circuit................................................ 985 Check Half-Latch Switch............................................................................................. 985 Check Close Switch.................................................................................................. 987 Check Open Switch................................................................................................... 988 Check Back Door Opener Switch (With Intelligent Key)................................................................ 989 Check Back Door Opener Switch (Without Intelligent Key)............................................................. 991 Check Unlock Sensor (Without Intelligent Key)....................................................................... 993 Check Closure Motor................................................................................................. 994 Removal and Installation of Back Door Closer Control Unit........................................................... 994 VEHICLE SECURITY (THEFT WARNING) SYSTEM................................................................................. 995 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location...................................................................... 995 System Description.................................................................................................. 997 DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................... 997 Operation Flow.............................................................................................. 997 Setting the Vehicle Security System......................................................................... 997 Canceling the Set Vehicle Security System................................................................... 998 Canceling the Alarm Operation of the Vehicle Security System................................................ 998 Activating the Alarm Operation of the Vehicle Security System............................................... 998 POWER SUPPLY.................................................................................................... 998 INITIAL CONDITION TO ACTIVATE THE SYSTEM........................................................................ 998 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM ALARM OPERATION......................................................................... 999 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM DEACTIVATION............................................................................ 999 PANIC ALARM OPERATION........................................................................................... 999 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................ 999 CAN Communication Unit.............................................................................................. 999 Schematic...........................................................................................................1000 Wiring Diagram — VEHSEC —...........................................................................................1001 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1006 Terminals and Reference Value for IPDM E/R..........................................................................1007 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................1007 CONSULT-II START PROCEDURE......................................................................................1007 CONSULT-II APPLICATION ITEM.....................................................................................1007 Work Support................................................................................................1007 Data Monitor................................................................................................1008 Active Test.................................................................................................1008 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1009 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................1009 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................1010 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................1011 Diagnostic Procedure 1..............................................................................................1012 1 – 1 DOOR SWITCH CHECK.........................................................................................1012 1 – 2 HOOD SWITCH CHECK.........................................................................................1014 1 – 3 BACK DOOR SWITCH CHECK....................................................................................1016 Diagnostic Procedure 2..............................................................................................1018 SECURITY INDICATOR LAMP CHECK...................................................................................1018 Diagnostic Procedure 3..............................................................................................1019 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CHECK............................................................................1019 Diagnostic Procedure 4..............................................................................................1019 VEHICLE SECURITY HORN ALARM CHECK...............................................................................1019 Diagnostic Procedure 5..............................................................................................1019 VEHICLE SECURITY HEADLAMP ALARM CHECK...........................................................................1019 Diagnostic Procedure 6..............................................................................................1019 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CHECK...............................................................................1019 IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS).........................................................................1020 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1020 System Description..................................................................................................1021 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1021 SECURITY INDICATOR..............................................................................................1021 Condition of Security Indicator.............................................................................1021 System Composition..................................................................................................1022 ECM Re-Communicating Function.......................................................................................1022 Wiring Diagram – NATS –.............................................................................................1023 MODELS WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM..............................................................................1023 MODELS WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM...........................................................................1025 Terminals and Reference Value for Steering Lock Unit/with Intelligent Key System....................................1026 Terminals and Reference Value for Intelligent Key Unit/with Intelligent Key System..................................1026 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1027 CONSULT-II..........................................................................................................1028 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................1028 CONSULT-II DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE FUNCTION........................................................................1029 HOW TO READ SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS.............................................................................1029 NATS SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT ITEM CHART..........................................................................1030 Diagnosis Procedure.................................................................................................1031 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................1031 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................1032 Security Indicator Inspection.......................................................................................1032 Diagnostic Procedure 1..............................................................................................1033 Diagnostic Procedure 2..............................................................................................1034 Diagnostic Procedure 3..............................................................................................1035 Diagnostic Procedure 4..............................................................................................1036 Diagnostic Procedure 5..............................................................................................1037 Diagnostic Procedure 6..............................................................................................1038 Diagnostic Procedure 7..............................................................................................1040 Removal and Installation NATS Antenna Amp...........................................................................1041 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1041 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1041 INTEGRATED HOMELINK TRANSMITTER.........................................................................................1042 Wiring Diagram —TRNSCV—.............................................................................................1042 Trouble Diagnoses...................................................................................................1043 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................1043 SYMPTOM: Transmitter Does Not Activate Receiver.............................................................1043 BODY REPAIR.............................................................................................................1045 Body Exterior Paint Color...........................................................................................1045 Body Component Parts................................................................................................1046 UNDERBODY COMPONENT PARTS.......................................................................................1046 BODY COMPONENT PARTS............................................................................................1048 Corrosion Protection................................................................................................1050 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1050 Anti-Corrosive Precoated Steel (Galvannealed Steel).........................................................1050 Phosphate Coating Treatment and Cationic Electrodeposition Primer...........................................1050 ANTI-CORROSIVE WAX..............................................................................................1051 UNDERCOATING....................................................................................................1052 Precautions in Undercoating.................................................................................1052 STONE GUARD COAT................................................................................................1053 Body Sealing........................................................................................................1054 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1054 Body Construction...................................................................................................1057 BODY CONSTRUCTION...............................................................................................1057 Body Alignment......................................................................................................1058 BODY CENTER MARKS...............................................................................................1058 PANEL PARTS MATCHING MARKS......................................................................................1059 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1060 ENGINE COMPARTMENT..............................................................................................1061 Measurement.................................................................................................1061 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1062 UNDERBODY.......................................................................................................1063 Measurement.................................................................................................1063 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1064 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT...........................................................................................1065 Measurement.................................................................................................1065 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1066 REAR BODY.......................................................................................................1067 Measurement.................................................................................................1067 Measurement Points..........................................................................................1068 Handling Precautions For Plastics...................................................................................1069 HANDLING PRECAUTIONS FOR PLASTICS...............................................................................1069 LOCATION OF PLASTIC PARTS......................................................................................1070 Precautions In Repairing High Strength Steel........................................................................1072 HIGH STRENGTH STEEL (HSS) USED IN NISSAN VEHICLES...............................................................1072 Read the Following Precautions When Repairing HSS:..........................................................1073 Replacement Operations..............................................................................................1075 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1075 HOODLEDGE.......................................................................................................1078 FRONT SIDE MEMBER...............................................................................................1080 FRONT SIDE MEMBER (PARTIAL REPLACEMENT).........................................................................1082 FRONT PILLAR....................................................................................................1084 CENTER PILLAR...................................................................................................1086 OUTER SILL......................................................................................................1088 REAR FENDER.....................................................................................................1090 REAR PANEL......................................................................................................1092 REAR END CROSSMEMBER............................................................................................1094 REAR FLOOR REAR.................................................................................................1096 REAR SIDE MEMBER EXTENSION......................................................................................1099 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 br..............................................................................................................................1102 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1102 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................1104 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................1104 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...................................................................1104 Precautions for Brake System........................................................................................1104 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................1105 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................1105 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................1106 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1106 BRAKE PEDAL.............................................................................................................1107 Inspection and Adjustment...........................................................................................1107 PLAY AND CLEARANCE BETWEEN BRAKE PEDAL AND FLOOR PANEL WITH PEDAL DEPRESSED.....................................1107 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................1107 Components..........................................................................................................1108 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1108 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1108 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................1109 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1109 BRAKE FLUID.............................................................................................................1110 On-Board Inspection.................................................................................................1110 LEVEL CHECK.....................................................................................................1110 Drain and Refill....................................................................................................1110 Bleeding Brake System...............................................................................................1111 BRAKE TUBE AND HOSE.....................................................................................................1112 Hydraulic Circuit...................................................................................................1112 Removal and Installation of Front Brake Tube and Brake Hose.........................................................1112 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1112 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1112 Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose........................................................1113 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1113 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1113 Inspection After Installation.......................................................................................1113 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER...................................................................................................1114 On-Board Inspection.................................................................................................1114 LEAK INSPECTION.................................................................................................1114 Components..........................................................................................................1114 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1114 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1114 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1115 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................1115 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1115 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1115 BRAKE BOOSTER...........................................................................................................1116 On-Vehicle Service..................................................................................................1116 OPERATING CHECK.................................................................................................1116 AIRTIGHT CHECK..................................................................................................1116 Components..........................................................................................................1116 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1117 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1117 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................1117 Output Rod Length Inspection................................................................................1117 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1117 VACUUM LINES............................................................................................................1118 Components..........................................................................................................1118 Removal and Installation............................................................................................1118 Inspection..........................................................................................................1119 VISUAL INSPECTION...............................................................................................1119 CHECK VALVE INSPECTION..........................................................................................1119 Airtightness Inspection.....................................................................................1119 FRONT DISC BRAKE........................................................................................................1120 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................1120 PAD WEAR INSPECTION.............................................................................................1120 Components..........................................................................................................1120 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad...............................................................................1121 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1121 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1121 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1121 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1121 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1122 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1122 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1122 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................1123 Cylinder Body...............................................................................................1123 Torque Member...............................................................................................1123 Piston......................................................................................................1123 Sliding Pin, Sliding Pin Bolt, and Sliding Pin Boot.........................................................1123 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1123 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION...........................................................................................1125 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................1125 Runout Inspection...........................................................................................1125 Thickness Inspection........................................................................................1125 Brake Burnishing Procedure..........................................................................................1125 REAR DISC BRAKE.........................................................................................................1126 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................1126 PAD WEAR INSPECTION.............................................................................................1126 Components..........................................................................................................1126 Removal and Installation of Brake Pad...............................................................................1127 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1127 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1127 Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1128 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1128 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1128 Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper Assembly..................................................................1128 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1128 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................1129 Cylinder Body...............................................................................................1129 Torque Member...............................................................................................1129 Piston......................................................................................................1129 Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots.....................................................................1129 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1130 DISC ROTOR INSPECTION...........................................................................................1132 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................1132 Runout Inspection...........................................................................................1132 Thickness Inspection........................................................................................1132 Brake Burnishing Procedure..........................................................................................1132 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................1133 General Specifications..............................................................................................1133 Brake Pedal.........................................................................................................1133 Brake Booster.......................................................................................................1133 Check Valve.........................................................................................................1133 Front Disc Brake....................................................................................................1133 Rear Disc Brake.....................................................................................................1133 brc.............................................................................................................................1134 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1134 VDC/TCS/ABS.............................................................................................................1136 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1136 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1136 Precautions for Brake System....................................................................................1136 Precautions for Brake Control...................................................................................1136 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1138 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1138 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1138 ON-VEHICLE SERVICE..................................................................................................1139 Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position............................................................1139 Calibration of Decel G Sensor (AWD Models)......................................................................1140 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..................................................................................................1141 System Diagram..................................................................................................1141 Functions.......................................................................................................1141 VDC.........................................................................................................1141 TCS.........................................................................................................1141 ABS.........................................................................................................1142 EBD.........................................................................................................1142 Fail-Safe Function..............................................................................................1142 VDC / TCS SYSTEM............................................................................................1142 ABS, EBD SYSTEM.............................................................................................1142 Hydraulic Circuit Diagram.......................................................................................1143 CAN Communication...............................................................................................1143 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1143 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................1144 Fail-Safe Function..............................................................................................1144 VDC/TCS SYSTEM..............................................................................................1144 ABS, EBD SYSTEM.............................................................................................1144 How to Proceed with Diagnosis...................................................................................1144 BASIC CONCEPT...............................................................................................1144 DIAGNOSIS FLOWCHART.........................................................................................1145 ASKING COMPLAINTS...........................................................................................1146 EXAMPLE OF DIAGNOSIS SHEET..................................................................................1146 Component Installation Location.................................................................................1147 Schematic.......................................................................................................1148 Wiring Diagram — VDC —..........................................................................................1149 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard.......................................................................1155 REFERENCE VALUE FROM CONSULT-II.............................................................................1155 CONSULT-II Functions (VDC)......................................................................................1157 CONSULT-II MAIN FUNCTION....................................................................................1157 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE................................................................................1157 Self-Diagnosis..................................................................................................1158 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1158 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1158 ERASE MEMORY................................................................................................1158 DISPLAY ITEM LIST...........................................................................................1159 Data Monitor....................................................................................................1162 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1162 DISPLAY ITEM LIST...........................................................................................1162 Active Test.....................................................................................................1164 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1164 TEST ITEM...................................................................................................1165 Solenoid Valve..........................................................................................1165 ABS Motor...............................................................................................1165 For Fast and Accurate Diagnosis.................................................................................1166 PRECAUTIONS FOR DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................1166 Basic Inspection................................................................................................1167 BRAKE FLUID AMOUNT, LEAKS, AND BRAKE PADS INSPECTION........................................................1167 POWER SYSTEM TERMINAL LOOSENESS AND BATTERY INSPECTION......................................................1167 ABS WARNING LAMP, VDC OFF INDICATOR LAMP, SLIP INDICATOR LAMP AND BRAKE WARNING LAMP INSPECTION.............1167 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM........................................................................................1169 Wheel Sensor Circuit............................................................................................1169 Engine System...................................................................................................1171 VDC/TCS/ABS Control Unit Circuit................................................................................1171 Pressure Sensor Circuit.........................................................................................1172 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit...................................................................................1173 Yaw Rate/Side G Sensor (2WD Models), Yaw Rate/Side/Decel G Sensor (AWD Models) Circuit..........................1174 Solenoid and VDC Change-Over Valve Circuit......................................................................1176 Actuator Motor Circuit..........................................................................................1177 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Power Supply and Ground Circuit...................................1178 Stop Lamp Switch Circuit........................................................................................1180 Brake Fluid Level Switch Circuit................................................................................1181 When “ST ANG SEN SIGNAL” Appears on Self-diagnosis Results Display..............................................1182 When “DECEL G SEN SET” Appears on Self-diagnostic Results Display (AWD Models)..................................1182 CAN Communication Circuit.......................................................................................1183 Component Inspection............................................................................................1183 VDC OFF SWITCH..............................................................................................1183 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS......................................................................................1184 Excessive ABS Function Operation Frequency......................................................................1184 Unexpected Pedal Reaction.......................................................................................1184 The Braking Distance is Long....................................................................................1185 The ABS Function Does Not Operate...............................................................................1185 Pedal Vibration or ABS Operation Sound Occurs...................................................................1185 Vehicle Jerks During VDC/TCS/ABS Control........................................................................1186 WHEEL SENSORS.......................................................................................................1188 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1188 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1188 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1188 SENSOR ROTOR........................................................................................................1190 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1190 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1190 Front...................................................................................................1190 Rear....................................................................................................1190 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1190 Front...................................................................................................1190 Rear....................................................................................................1190 ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)...............................................................................1191 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1191 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1191 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1192 G SENSOR............................................................................................................1193 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1193 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1193 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1193 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR...............................................................................................1194 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1194 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1194 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1194 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT........................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS.................................................................................................... 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)....................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)..................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX.................................................................................... 81 co..............................................................................................................................1196 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1196 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................1198 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1198 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1198 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................1198 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................1198 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................1198 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1200 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1200 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1201 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS..........................................................................................1202 Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1202 COOLING SYSTEM......................................................................................................1204 Cooling Circuit.................................................................................................1204 System Chart....................................................................................................1205 ENGINE COOLANT......................................................................................................1206 Inspection......................................................................................................1206 LEVEL CHECK.................................................................................................1206 LEAK CHECK..................................................................................................1206 Changing Engine Coolant.........................................................................................1206 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.....................................................................................1206 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT....................................................................................1207 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.....................................................................................1208 RADIATOR............................................................................................................1209 Components......................................................................................................1209 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1209 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1209 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1210 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1210 Checking Radiator Cap...........................................................................................1210 Checking Radiator...............................................................................................1211 RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)............................................................................................1212 Components......................................................................................................1212 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1212 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1212 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1212 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1213 INSPECTION..................................................................................................1215 COOLING FAN.........................................................................................................1216 Components......................................................................................................1216 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1216 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1216 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1216 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1216 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1216 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1216 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................1216 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................1216 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1216 WATER PUMP..........................................................................................................1217 Components......................................................................................................1217 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1217 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1217 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1219 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1219 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1221 WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY.................................................................................1222 Components......................................................................................................1222 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1222 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1222 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1223 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1223 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1223 WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING.......................................................................................1224 Components......................................................................................................1224 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1224 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1224 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1225 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1225 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................1226 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................1226 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE).......................................................................1226 RADIATOR....................................................................................................1226 THERMOSTAT..................................................................................................1226 VK45DE..................................................................................................................1227 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1227 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1227 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1228 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1228 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1228 OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS..........................................................................................1229 Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................1229 COOLING SYSTEM......................................................................................................1231 Cooling Circuit.................................................................................................1231 System Chart....................................................................................................1232 ENGINE COOLANT......................................................................................................1233 Inspection......................................................................................................1233 LEVEL CHECK.................................................................................................1233 LEAK CHECK..................................................................................................1233 Changing Engine Coolant.........................................................................................1233 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.....................................................................................1233 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT....................................................................................1234 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.....................................................................................1235 RADIATOR............................................................................................................1236 Components......................................................................................................1236 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1236 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1236 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1238 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1238 Checking Radiator Cap...........................................................................................1238 Checking Radiator...............................................................................................1239 RADIATOR (ALUMINUM TYPE)............................................................................................1240 Components......................................................................................................1240 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................1240 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1240 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1240 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1241 INSPECTION..................................................................................................1243 COOLING FAN.........................................................................................................1244 Components (Crankshaft Driven type).............................................................................1244 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1244 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1244 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1244 Fan Coupling............................................................................................1244 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................1244 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1244 Components (Motor Driven Type)..................................................................................1245 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1245 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1245 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1245 Disassembly and Assembly (Motor Driven Type)....................................................................1245 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................1245 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................1245 Cooling Fan.............................................................................................1245 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................1245 WATER PUMP..........................................................................................................1246 Components......................................................................................................1246 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1246 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1246 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1247 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1247 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1247 THERMOSTAT AND WATER CONTROL VALVE..................................................................................1248 Components......................................................................................................1248 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1249 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................1249 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................1249 INSTALLATION................................................................................................1249 Thermostat and Water Control Valve......................................................................1250 Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe.......................................................................1250 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................1250 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................1251 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................1251 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE).......................................................................1251 RADIATOR....................................................................................................1251 THERMOSTAT..................................................................................................1251 WATER CONTROL VALVE.........................................................................................1251 di..............................................................................................................................1252 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1252 PRECAUTION..............................................................................................................1255 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................1255 COMBINATION METERS......................................................................................................1256 System Description..................................................................................................1256 UNIFIED METER CONTROL UNIT......................................................................................1256 UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.......................................................................................1256 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.................................................................................1256 SPEEDOMETER.....................................................................................................1257 TACHOMETER......................................................................................................1257 WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE.........................................................................................1257 FUEL GAUGE......................................................................................................1258 ODO/TRIP METER..................................................................................................1258 How to Change The Display For Odo/trip Meter................................................................1258 COMBINATION METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL..........................................................................1259 Daytime Mode................................................................................................1259 Nighttime Mode..............................................................................................1259 FAIL-SAFE.......................................................................................................1259 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1260 Arrangement of Combination Meter....................................................................................1261 Circuit Diagram.....................................................................................................1262 Wiring Diagram — METER —............................................................................................1263 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter.................................................................1265 Terminals and Reference Value for Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................................1266 Self-Diagnosis Mode of Combination Meter............................................................................1266 SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION.........................................................................................1266 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................1266 CONSULT-II Function (METER A/C AMP).................................................................................1267 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1267 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS................................................................................1267 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................1268 Symptom Chart.......................................................................................................1268 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1269 Vehicle Speed Signal Inspection.....................................................................................1270 Engine Speed Signal Inspection......................................................................................1271 Engine Coolant Temperature Signal Inspection........................................................................1272 Fuel Level Sensor Signal Inspection.................................................................................1272 Fuel Gauge Pointer Fluctuates, Indicator Wrong Value or Varies......................................................1274 Fuel Gauge Does Not Move to FULL Position...........................................................................1274 Odo/Trip Meter and Illumination Control Switch Inspection...........................................................1275 Electrical Components Inspection....................................................................................1275 ODO/TRIP METER AND ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH..................................................................1275 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT..........................................................................................1275 Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Fuel Pump (Main).................................................................1275 Fuel Level Sensor Unit and Pump (Main) Harness..............................................................1276 Fuel Level Sensor Unit (Sub)................................................................................1276 Removal and Installation of Combination Meter.......................................................................1276 Disassembly and Assembly of Combination Meter.......................................................................1276 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................1277 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................1278 Removal and Installation of Odo/Trip Meter and Illumination Control Switch..........................................1278 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1278 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1278 UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP...............................................................................................1279 System Description..................................................................................................1279 COMBINATION METER CONTROL FUNCTION..............................................................................1279 Input/output signals between unified meter and A/C amp. and combination meter...............................1279 A/C AUTO AMP. FUNCTION..........................................................................................1280 OTHER FUNCTIONS.................................................................................................1280 Drive Computer Function.....................................................................................1280 Signal Buffer Function......................................................................................1280 Schematic...........................................................................................................1281 CONSULT-II Function (METER A/C AMP).................................................................................1282 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1282 SELF-DIAG RESULTS...............................................................................................1282 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1282 Display Item List...........................................................................................1282 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1283 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1283 Display Item List...........................................................................................1283 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1284 DTC [U1000] CAN Communication Circuit...............................................................................1285 DTC [B2202] Meter Communication Circuit.............................................................................1285 DTC [B2205] Vehicle Speed Circuit...................................................................................1288 Removal and Installation of Unified Meter and A/C Amp...............................................................1288 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1288 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1288 WARNING LAMPS...........................................................................................................1289 System Description..................................................................................................1289 OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP.......................................................................................1289 Schematic...........................................................................................................1290 Wiring Diagram — WARN —.............................................................................................1291 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Stays Off (Ignition Switch ON)............................................................1299 Oil Pressure Warning Lamp Does Not Turn Off (Oil Pressure Is Normal)................................................1300 Component Inspection................................................................................................1302 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.............................................................................................1302 A/T INDICATOR...........................................................................................................1303 System Description..................................................................................................1303 MANUAL MODE.....................................................................................................1303 NOT MANUAL MODE.................................................................................................1303 Wiring Diagram — AT/IND —...........................................................................................1304 A/T Indicator Is Malfunction........................................................................................1306 WARNING CHIME...........................................................................................................1307 System Description..................................................................................................1307 POWER SUPPLY AND CIRCUIT........................................................................................1307 IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME (WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY)............................................................1308 IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME (WITH INTELLIGENT KEY)...............................................................1308 When Mechanical Key Is Used.................................................................................1308 When Intelligent Key Is Carried With The Driver.............................................................1308 LIGHT WARNING CHIME.............................................................................................1309 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME.........................................................................................1309 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1310 Schematic...........................................................................................................1311 Wiring Diagram — CHIME —............................................................................................1312 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................1315 Terminals and Reference Value for Unified Meter and A/C Amp.........................................................1319 Terminals and Reference Value for Combination Meter.................................................................1320 CONSULT-II Function (METER A/C AMP).................................................................................1320 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................1320 DIAGNOSIS ITEMS DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................1320 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1320 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1320 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1320 Display Item List...........................................................................................1321 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................1321 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1321 Display Item List...........................................................................................1321 SELF-DIAG RESULTS...............................................................................................1321 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1321 Display Item List...........................................................................................1321 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1321 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS................................................................................1321 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION..........................................................................................1322 Symptom Chart.......................................................................................................1322 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1322 Combination Meter Buzzer Circuit Inspection.........................................................................1323 Front Door Switch (Driver Side) Signal Inspection...................................................................1325 Key Switch Signal Inspection (Without Intelligent Key)..............................................................1326 Key Switch and Ignition Knob Switch Signal Inspection (With Intelligent Key, When Mechanical Key ...................1327 Lighting Switch Signal Inspection...................................................................................1328 Seat Belt Buckle Switch (Driver Side) Signal Inspection.............................................................1329 Component Inspection................................................................................................1330 FRONT DOOR SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE).................................................................................1330 KEY SWITCH......................................................................................................1330 KEY SWITCH AND IGNITION KNOB SWITCH.............................................................................1330 SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE)...........................................................................1330 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM...........................................................................................1331 Precautions for Lane Departure Warning (LDW) system.................................................................1331 System Description..................................................................................................1331 LDW SYSTEM OPERATION............................................................................................1331 Warning Function............................................................................................1332 System Diagram..............................................................................................1333 Components Description......................................................................................1333 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.................................................................................1333 Action Test.........................................................................................................1334 LDW SYSTEM RUNNING TEST.........................................................................................1334 Function Check..............................................................................................1334 Camera Aiming Adjustment............................................................................................1334 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................1334 PREPARATION.....................................................................................................1334 TARGET SETTING..................................................................................................1334 Preparation Aiming Adjustment Jig...........................................................................1334 Target......................................................................................................1335 Target Setting..............................................................................................1336 VEHICLE HEIGHT CHECK............................................................................................1337 AIMING ADJUSTMENT...............................................................................................1337 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1337 Check After The Adjustment..................................................................................1341 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1341 Schematic...........................................................................................................1342 Wiring Diagram — LDW —..............................................................................................1343 Terminals and Reference Value for LDW Camera Unit...................................................................1346 CONSULT-II Function (LDW)...........................................................................................1346 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................1346 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1346 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................1346 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1346 Display Item................................................................................................1346 SELF-DIAG RESULTS...............................................................................................1346 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1346 Display Item................................................................................................1347 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1347 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1347 Monitored Item..............................................................................................1347 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................1348 Active Test Item............................................................................................1348 BUZZER DRIVE................................................................................................1348 SYSTEM ON LAMP DRIVE........................................................................................1348 INDICATOR LAMP DRIVE........................................................................................1349 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................1349 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS................................................................................1349 SYMPTOM CHART...................................................................................................1349 Preliminary Inspection..............................................................................................1349 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1350 DTC [C1B00] CAMERA UNIT MALF........................................................................................1351 DTC [C1B01] CAM AIMING INCMP........................................................................................1351 DTC [C1B02] VHCL SPD DATA MALF......................................................................................1351 DTC [C1B03] ABNRML TEMP DETECT......................................................................................1352 DTC [U1000] CAN COMM CIRCUIT........................................................................................1352 DTC [U1010] CONTROL UNIT (CAN)......................................................................................1352 LDW Chime Circuit Inspection........................................................................................1352 LDW Switch Circuit Inspection.......................................................................................1353 LDW Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection...............................................................................1356 Turn Signal Input Inspection........................................................................................1357 Electrical Component Inspection.....................................................................................1357 LDW SWITCH......................................................................................................1357 Removal and Installation for LDW Camera Unit........................................................................1358 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1358 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1358 Removal and Installation for LDW Chime..............................................................................1358 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1358 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1358 Removal and Installation for LDW Switch.............................................................................1358 CAN COMMUNICATION.......................................................................................................1359 System Description..................................................................................................1359 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................1359 COMPASS.................................................................................................................1360 Precautions for Compass.............................................................................................1360 System Description..................................................................................................1360 Troubleshooting.....................................................................................................1361 Zone Variation Setting Procedure....................................................................................1362 Calibration Procedure...............................................................................................1362 Wiring Diagram — COMPAS —...........................................................................................1363 Removal and Installation of Compass.................................................................................1364 CLOCK...................................................................................................................1365 Wiring Diagram — CLOCK —............................................................................................1365 Removal and Installation of Clock...................................................................................1366 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1366 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1366 REAR VIEW MONITOR.......................................................................................................1367 System Description..................................................................................................1367 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND.........................................................................................1367 AV COMMUNICATION LINE...........................................................................................1367 REAR VIEW CAMERA OPERATION......................................................................................1367 Side Distance Guideline.....................................................................................1368 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................1368 Schematic...........................................................................................................1369 Wiring Diagram — R/VIEW —...........................................................................................1370 Terminals and Reference Value for Rear View Camera Control Unit.....................................................1373 CONSULT-II Function (REARVIEW CAMERA)...............................................................................1374 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................1374 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................1374 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1374 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................1374 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................1374 Display Item List...........................................................................................1374 Side Distance Guideline Correction..................................................................................1375 SIDE DISTANCE GUIDELINE CORRECTION PROCEDURE....................................................................1375 Power Supply and Ground Circuit Inspection..........................................................................1377 Rear View Is Not Displayed With The A/T Selector Lever In R-Position................................................1378 The Rear View Image Is Distorted....................................................................................1382 Removal and Installation of Rear View Camera Control Unit...........................................................1383 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1383 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1383 Removal and Installation of Rear View Camera........................................................................1384 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................1384 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................1384 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 ec..............................................................................................................................1386 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................1386 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................1400 INDEX FOR DTC.......................................................................................................1400 DTC No. Index...................................................................................................1400 Alphabetical Index..............................................................................................1404 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................1408 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................1408 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T..............................................................1408 Precaution......................................................................................................1408 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................1412 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................1412 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................1414 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM...............................................................................................1415 System Diagram..................................................................................................1415 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System...........................................................................1416 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1416 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1416 VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION.......................................................1416 MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)........................................................1417 Open Loop Control.......................................................................................1417 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL.........................................................................1417 FUEL INJECTION TIMING.......................................................................................1418 Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System..............................................................1418 Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System............................................................1418 FUEL SHUT-OFF...............................................................................................1418 Electronic Ignition (EI) System.................................................................................1418 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1418 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1418 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed).............................................................1419 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1419 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1419 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL........................................................................................1420 Input/Output Signal Chart.......................................................................................1420 System Description..............................................................................................1420 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)...............................................................................1421 System Description..............................................................................................1421 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................1421 BASIC ASCD SYSTEM...........................................................................................1421 SET OPERATION...............................................................................................1421 ACCELERATOR OPERATION.......................................................................................1421 CANCEL OPERATION............................................................................................1421 COAST OPERATION.............................................................................................1422 RESUME OPERATION............................................................................................1422 Component Description...........................................................................................1422 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................1422 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................1422 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1422 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1422 ASCD INDICATOR..............................................................................................1422 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................1423 System Description..............................................................................................1423 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM.........................................................................................1424 Description.....................................................................................................1424 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1424 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING...........................................................................1425 Component Inspection............................................................................................1427 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................1427 FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)..................................................1427 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1427 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1427 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1427 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1427 EVAP SERVICE PORT...........................................................................................1428 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1428 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................1428 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1428 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage................................................................................1428 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1429 WITHOUT CONSULT-II..........................................................................................1429 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)............................................................................1431 System Description..............................................................................................1431 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1432 SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.............................................................1432 SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING.....................1433 Component Inspection............................................................................................1434 REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE..............................................................................1434 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1434 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1435 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION......................................................................................1436 Description.....................................................................................................1436 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1436 Component Inspection............................................................................................1436 PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE..................................................................1436 PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE..................................................................................1437 IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS).....................................................................1438 Description.....................................................................................................1438 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM....................................................................................1439 Introduction....................................................................................................1439 Two Trip Detection Logic........................................................................................1439 Emission-Related Diagnostic Information.........................................................................1440 EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS...............................................................1440 DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC........................................................................................1443 How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC........................................................................1444 FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA............................................................1444 SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE............................................................................1445 SRT Item................................................................................................1445 SRT Set Timing..........................................................................................1445 SRT Service Procedure...................................................................................1446 How to Display SRT Status...............................................................................1447 How to Set SRT Code.....................................................................................1448 Driving Pattern.........................................................................................1449 TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II).........................................1450 HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION........................................................1452 How to Erase DTC........................................................................................1452 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)................................................................................1453 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1453 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION.........................................................................1454 MIL Flashing Without DTC................................................................................1454 HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE..........................................................................1454 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)............................................1454 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-Diagnostic Results)..........................................1455 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK.........................................................................1455 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING................................................................1455 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS...........................................................1456 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................1456 OBD System Operation Chart......................................................................................1457 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS...........................................1457 SUMMARY CHART...............................................................................................1457 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” <EXHAUST QUALITY ...........1458 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION S...........1459 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................1459 <Driving Pattern C>.....................................................................................1459 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS............................................1460 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS............................................................................1461 <Driving Pattern A>.....................................................................................1461 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................1461 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE.............................................................................................1462 Basic Inspection................................................................................................1462 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check............................................................................1467 IDLE SPEED..................................................................................................1467 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1467 With GST................................................................................................1467 IGNITION TIMING.............................................................................................1467 Method A................................................................................................1467 Method B................................................................................................1467 VIN Registration................................................................................................1468 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1468 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1468 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1468 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning....................................................................1469 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1469 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1469 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.........................................................................1469 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1469 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1469 Idle Air Volume Learning........................................................................................1469 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1469 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1469 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................1469 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1469 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1470 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE........................................................................................1471 Fuel Pressure Check.............................................................................................1471 FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE.......................................................................................1471 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1471 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1472 FUEL PRESSURE CHECK.........................................................................................1472 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................1473 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction..................................................................................1473 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................1473 WORK FLOW...................................................................................................1474 Overall Sequence........................................................................................1474 Detailed Flow...........................................................................................1475 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET........................................................................................1477 Description.............................................................................................1477 Worksheet Sample........................................................................................1478 DTC Inspection Priority Chart...................................................................................1479 Fail-Safe Chart.................................................................................................1481 Symptom Matrix Chart............................................................................................1482 SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM........................................................................1482 SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER..........................................................................1484 Engine Control Component Parts Location.........................................................................1486 Vacuum Hose Drawing.............................................................................................1492 Circuit Diagram.................................................................................................1493 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout...........................................................................1495 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...............................................................................1495 PREPARATION.................................................................................................1495 ECM INSPECTION TABLE........................................................................................1495 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)....................................................................................1504 FUNCTION....................................................................................................1504 ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION..................................................1505 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1506 WORK SUPPORT MODE...........................................................................................1506 Work Item...............................................................................................1506 SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE......................................................................................1507 Self Diagnostic Item....................................................................................1507 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data........................................................1507 DATA MONITOR MODE...........................................................................................1508 Monitored Item..........................................................................................1508 DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE....................................................................................1512 Monitored Item..........................................................................................1512 ACTIVE TEST MODE............................................................................................1512 Test Item...............................................................................................1512 DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE.................................................................................1513 SRT STATUS Mode.........................................................................................1513 SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode...................................................................................1513 DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode...................................................................................1513 REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)...........................................1514 Description.............................................................................................1514 Operation...............................................................................................1514 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function................................................................................1515 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................1515 FUNCTION....................................................................................................1515 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................1516 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor......................................................................1518 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode...............................................................1521 CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1......................................................................1521 ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1.............................................1521 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.............................................................................1523 Description.....................................................................................................1523 Testing Condition...............................................................................................1523 Inspection Procedure............................................................................................1523 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1524 OVERALL SEQUENCE............................................................................................1524 DETAILED PROCEDURE..........................................................................................1526 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.........................................................................1533 Description.....................................................................................................1533 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1533 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.....................................................................................1534 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1534 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1535 Ground Inspection...............................................................................................1539 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE.............................................................................1541 Description.....................................................................................................1541 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1541 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1541 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1542 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1543 DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION.........................................................................................1544 Description.....................................................................................................1544 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1544 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1544 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1544 WITH GST....................................................................................................1544 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1545 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL........................................................................................1546 Description.....................................................................................................1546 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1546 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1546 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1547 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1547 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1547 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1547 WITH GST....................................................................................................1548 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1548 Component Inspection............................................................................................1549 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1549 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1549 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1549 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER..................................................................1550 Description.....................................................................................................1550 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1550 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1550 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1550 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1550 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1550 WITH GST....................................................................................................1551 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1552 BANK 1......................................................................................................1552 BANK 2......................................................................................................1554 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1555 Component Inspection............................................................................................1557 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER........................................................................1557 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1557 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1557 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.........................................................................1558 Description.....................................................................................................1558 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1558 OPERATION...................................................................................................1558 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1558 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1558 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1559 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1559 WITH GST....................................................................................................1559 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1560 BANK 1......................................................................................................1560 BANK 2......................................................................................................1562 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1563 Component Inspection............................................................................................1565 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER...............................................................................1565 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1565 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1565 DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................................1566 Component Description...........................................................................................1566 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1566 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1566 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1566 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1566 WITH GST....................................................................................................1566 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1567 BANK 1......................................................................................................1567 BANK 2......................................................................................................1569 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1571 Component Inspection............................................................................................1572 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1572 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1572 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................1572 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR................................................................................................1573 Component Description...........................................................................................1573 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1573 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1573 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1574 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1574 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1574 With GST................................................................................................1574 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1574 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1574 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1575 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1575 With GST................................................................................................1575 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1576 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1577 Component Inspection............................................................................................1580 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1580 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1580 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1580 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1581 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1581 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.........................................................................................1582 Component Description...........................................................................................1582 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1582 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1582 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1582 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1583 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102.....................................................................................1583 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1583 With GST................................................................................................1583 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103.....................................................................................1583 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1583 With GST................................................................................................1583 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1584 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1585 Component Inspection............................................................................................1588 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1588 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1588 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1588 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1589 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1589 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR.........................................................................................1590 Component Description...........................................................................................1590 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1590 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1590 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1590 WITH GST....................................................................................................1591 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1592 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1593 Component Inspection............................................................................................1594 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................1594 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1594 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1594 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR.........................................................................................1595 Component Description...........................................................................................1595 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1595 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1595 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1596 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1596 WITH GST....................................................................................................1596 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1597 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1598 Component Inspection............................................................................................1599 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1599 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1599 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1599 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................1600 Component Description...........................................................................................1600 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1600 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1600 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1600 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1601 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1601 WITH GST....................................................................................................1601 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1602 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1603 Component Inspection............................................................................................1606 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1606 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1606 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1606 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR................................................................................................1607 Component Description...........................................................................................1607 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1607 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1608 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1608 WITH GST....................................................................................................1608 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1608 Component Inspection............................................................................................1609 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1609 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1609 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1609 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR................................................................................................1610 Component Description...........................................................................................1610 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1610 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1610 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1610 WITH GST....................................................................................................1611 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1611 Component Inspection............................................................................................1612 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................1612 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1612 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................1612 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.......................................................................................1613 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1613 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1613 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1613 WITH GST....................................................................................................1613 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1613 Component Inspection............................................................................................1614 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1614 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1614 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................1614 DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1615 Component Description...........................................................................................1615 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1615 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1615 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1615 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1615 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1616 WITH GST....................................................................................................1616 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1618 BANK 1......................................................................................................1618 BANK 2......................................................................................................1620 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1621 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1624 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1624 DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1625 Component Description...........................................................................................1625 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1625 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1625 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1626 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1626 WITH GST....................................................................................................1626 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1627 BANK 1......................................................................................................1627 BANK 2......................................................................................................1629 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1630 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1633 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1633 DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1634 Component Description...........................................................................................1634 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1634 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1634 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1635 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1635 WITH GST....................................................................................................1635 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1636 BANK 1......................................................................................................1636 BANK 2......................................................................................................1638 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1639 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1642 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1642 DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1643 Component Description...........................................................................................1643 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1643 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1643 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1644 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1644 WITH GST....................................................................................................1644 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1646 BANK 1......................................................................................................1646 BANK 2......................................................................................................1648 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1649 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1654 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................1654 DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2..............................................................................................1655 Component Description...........................................................................................1655 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1655 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1655 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1656 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1656 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1656 WITH GST....................................................................................................1656 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1658 BANK 1......................................................................................................1658 BANK 2......................................................................................................1660 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1661 Component Inspection............................................................................................1663 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1663 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1663 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1664 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1665 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1665 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2..............................................................................................1666 Component Description...........................................................................................1666 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1666 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1666 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1667 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1667 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1667 With GST................................................................................................1667 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1667 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1667 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1668 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1668 With GST................................................................................................1668 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1669 BANK 1......................................................................................................1669 BANK 2......................................................................................................1671 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1672 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1672 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1674 Component Inspection............................................................................................1676 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1676 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1676 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1677 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1678 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1678 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2..............................................................................................1679 Component Description...........................................................................................1679 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1679 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1679 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1680 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1680 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1680 WITH GST....................................................................................................1680 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1682 BANK 1......................................................................................................1682 BANK 2......................................................................................................1684 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1685 Component Inspection............................................................................................1687 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1687 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1687 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1688 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1689 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................1689 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................1690 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1690 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1690 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1690 WITH GST....................................................................................................1691 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1692 BANK 1......................................................................................................1692 BANK 2......................................................................................................1694 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1696 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................1702 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1702 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1702 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1702 WITH GST....................................................................................................1703 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1704 BANK 1......................................................................................................1704 BANK 2......................................................................................................1706 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1708 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR................................................................................................1713 Component Description...........................................................................................1713 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1713 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1713 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1713 WITH GST....................................................................................................1714 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1715 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1716 Component Inspection............................................................................................1718 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1718 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1718 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1718 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR.........................................................................................1719 Component Description...........................................................................................1719 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1719 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1719 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1719 WITH GST....................................................................................................1719 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1720 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1721 Component Inspection............................................................................................1723 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1723 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1723 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................1723 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................1724 Component Description...........................................................................................1724 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1724 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1724 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1724 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1725 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1725 WITH GST....................................................................................................1725 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1726 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1727 Component Inspection............................................................................................1730 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1730 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1730 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1730 DTC P0300 - P0306 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 6 CYLINDER MISFIRE.............................................1731 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1731 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1732 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1732 WITH GST....................................................................................................1732 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1732 DTC P0327, P0328 KS.................................................................................................1741 Component Description...........................................................................................1741 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1741 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1741 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1741 WITH GST....................................................................................................1741 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1742 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1743 Component Inspection............................................................................................1744 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................1744 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1745 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................1745 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)..........................................................................................1746 Component Description...........................................................................................1746 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1746 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1746 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1747 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1747 WITH GST....................................................................................................1747 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1748 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1749 Component Inspection............................................................................................1752 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................1752 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1752 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................1752 DTC P0340, P0345 CMP SENSOR (PHASE).................................................................................1753 Component Description...........................................................................................1753 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1753 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1753 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1754 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1754 WITH GST....................................................................................................1754 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1755 BANK 1......................................................................................................1755 BANK 2......................................................................................................1757 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1758 Component Inspection............................................................................................1761 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................1761 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1761 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................1761 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION........................................................................1762 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1762 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1762 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1762 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1763 WITH GST....................................................................................................1763 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1764 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1768 System Description..............................................................................................1768 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1768 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1768 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1769 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1769 WITH GST....................................................................................................1769 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1770 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1773 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1773 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1774 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1774 WITH GST....................................................................................................1775 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1775 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................1782 Description.....................................................................................................1782 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1782 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1782 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1782 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1783 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1783 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1783 WITH GST....................................................................................................1783 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1784 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1786 Component Inspection............................................................................................1789 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1789 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1789 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1789 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1789 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1789 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................1790 Description.....................................................................................................1790 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1790 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1790 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1790 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1791 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1791 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1791 WITH GST....................................................................................................1791 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1792 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1794 Component Inspection............................................................................................1795 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1795 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1795 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1795 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1796 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................1796 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................1797 Component Description...........................................................................................1797 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1797 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1797 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1798 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1798 WITH GST....................................................................................................1798 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1799 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1800 Component Inspection............................................................................................1802 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1802 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1802 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1803 DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................1804 Component Description...........................................................................................1804 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1804 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1804 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1805 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1805 WITH GST....................................................................................................1805 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1806 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1807 Component Inspection............................................................................................1808 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................1808 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1808 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................1809 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1810 Component Description...........................................................................................1810 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1810 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1810 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1811 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1811 WITH GST....................................................................................................1811 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1811 Component Inspection............................................................................................1812 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1812 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1813 Component Description...........................................................................................1813 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1813 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1813 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1814 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1814 WITH GST....................................................................................................1814 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1815 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1816 Component Inspection............................................................................................1818 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1818 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................1819 Component Description...........................................................................................1819 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1819 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1819 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1820 With CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1820 With GST....................................................................................................1820 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1821 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1822 Component Inspection............................................................................................1826 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................1826 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1827 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1827 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1828 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1828 WITH GST....................................................................................................1829 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1829 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................1835 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1835 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1836 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1836 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1837 WITH GST....................................................................................................1837 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1838 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................1845 Component Description...........................................................................................1845 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1845 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1845 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1845 WITH GST....................................................................................................1845 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1846 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1846 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1846 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................1847 Component Description...........................................................................................1847 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1847 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1847 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1847 WITH GST....................................................................................................1848 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1848 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1848 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1848 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR..................................................................................1849 Component Description...........................................................................................1849 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1849 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1849 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1849 WITH GST....................................................................................................1849 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1850 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1850 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................1850 DTC P0500 VSS.......................................................................................................1851 Description.....................................................................................................1851 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1851 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1851 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1851 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1851 WITH GST....................................................................................................1852 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1852 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................1853 Description.....................................................................................................1853 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1853 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1853 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1853 WITH GST....................................................................................................1853 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1854 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................1855 Description.....................................................................................................1855 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1855 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1855 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1855 WITH GST....................................................................................................1855 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1856 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR................................................................................................1857 Component Description...........................................................................................1857 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1857 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1857 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1857 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1857 WITH GST....................................................................................................1857 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1858 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1859 Component Inspection............................................................................................1861 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................1861 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1861 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................1861 DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY..........................................................................................1862 Component Description...........................................................................................1862 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1862 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1862 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1862 WITH GST....................................................................................................1862 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1863 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1864 DTC P0605 ECM.......................................................................................................1866 Component Description...........................................................................................1866 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1866 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1866 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1866 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................1866 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1866 With GST................................................................................................1866 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................1867 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1867 With GST................................................................................................1867 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................1867 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1867 With GST................................................................................................1867 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1867 DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY.......................................................................................1869 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1869 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1869 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1869 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1869 WITH GST....................................................................................................1869 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1870 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1872 DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH................................................................................................1874 Component Description...........................................................................................1874 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1874 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1874 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1874 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1874 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1875 WITH GST....................................................................................................1875 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1876 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1877 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL................................................................................1879 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1879 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................................1880 Description.....................................................................................................1880 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1880 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1880 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1880 WITH GST....................................................................................................1880 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1880 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE....................................................................................1881 Description.....................................................................................................1881 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1881 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1881 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1881 WITH GST....................................................................................................1881 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1881 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE...................................................................................1882 Description.....................................................................................................1882 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................1882 Cooling Fan Control.....................................................................................1882 Cooling Fan Operation...................................................................................1882 Cooling Fan Relay Operation.............................................................................1883 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................1883 Cooling Fan Motor.......................................................................................1883 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1883 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1883 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................1884 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1884 WITH GST....................................................................................................1885 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1886 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1888 PROCEDURE A.................................................................................................1888 PROCEDURE B.................................................................................................1890 Main 12 Causes of Overheating...................................................................................1893 Component Inspection............................................................................................1893 COOLING FAN MOTORS-1 AND -2.................................................................................1893 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1895 Component Description...........................................................................................1895 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1895 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1895 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1895 WITH GST....................................................................................................1895 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1896 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1896 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1896 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1897 Component Description...........................................................................................1897 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1897 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1897 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1897 WITH GST....................................................................................................1897 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1898 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1898 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1898 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH.......................................................................................1899 Component Description...........................................................................................1899 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1899 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1899 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1900 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1900 WITH GST....................................................................................................1900 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1901 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1902 Component Inspection............................................................................................1905 ICC STEERING SWITCH.........................................................................................1905 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH......................................................................................1906 Component Description...........................................................................................1906 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1906 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1906 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1907 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1907 WITH GST....................................................................................................1907 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1908 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1909 Component Inspection............................................................................................1911 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................1911 DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION..............................................................................................1913 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1913 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1913 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1913 WITH GST....................................................................................................1913 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1913 DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH..........................................................................................1914 Component Description...........................................................................................1914 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1914 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1914 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1915 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1915 WITH GST....................................................................................................1915 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1916 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1917 Component Inspection............................................................................................1922 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................1922 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1922 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................1922 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH.........................................................................................1923 Component Description...........................................................................................1923 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1923 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1923 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1924 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1924 WITH GST....................................................................................................1924 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1925 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1926 Component Inspection............................................................................................1930 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................1930 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1930 DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR..................................................................................1931 Component Description...........................................................................................1931 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1931 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1931 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1931 WITH GST....................................................................................................1931 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1932 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.................................................................................1933 Component Description...........................................................................................1933 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1933 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1933 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1933 WITH GST....................................................................................................1933 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1934 DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)............................................................1935 Description.....................................................................................................1935 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1935 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1935 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1935 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH..............................................................................................1936 Description.....................................................................................................1936 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1936 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1936 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1936 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1936 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1936 WITH GST....................................................................................................1936 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1937 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1938 Component Inspection............................................................................................1940 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................1940 DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY.......................................................................1941 Component Description...........................................................................................1941 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1941 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1941 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1941 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1941 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2100.....................................................................................1941 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1941 With GST................................................................................................1941 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2103.....................................................................................1942 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1942 With GST................................................................................................1942 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1943 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1944 DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION........................................................................1947 Description.....................................................................................................1947 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1947 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1947 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1947 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1947 WITH GST....................................................................................................1947 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1948 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1949 Component Inspection............................................................................................1952 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................1952 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1952 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1952 DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR....................................................................................1953 Component Description...........................................................................................1953 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1953 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1953 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1953 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1953 WITH GST....................................................................................................1953 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1954 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1955 Component Inspection............................................................................................1956 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................1956 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1957 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1957 DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR........................................................................1958 Component Description...........................................................................................1958 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1958 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1958 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1958 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B...........................................................................1958 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1958 With GST................................................................................................1958 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................1959 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................1959 With GST................................................................................................1959 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1959 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................1960 Component Description...........................................................................................1960 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1960 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1960 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1960 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1961 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1961 WITH GST....................................................................................................1961 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1962 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1963 Component Inspection............................................................................................1966 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................1966 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1966 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................1966 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................1967 Component Description...........................................................................................1967 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1967 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1967 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1967 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1968 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1968 WITH GST....................................................................................................1968 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1969 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1970 Component Inspection............................................................................................1973 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................1973 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1973 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................1973 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................1974 Component Description...........................................................................................1974 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1974 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1974 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1974 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1975 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1975 WITH GST....................................................................................................1975 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1976 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1977 Component Inspection............................................................................................1980 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................1980 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1980 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................1980 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR................................................................................................1981 Component Description...........................................................................................1981 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1981 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1981 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................1981 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1982 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1982 WITH GST....................................................................................................1982 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1983 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1984 Component Inspection............................................................................................1988 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................1988 Removal and Installation........................................................................................1988 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................1988 DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................1989 Component Description...........................................................................................1989 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................1989 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................1989 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................1990 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................1990 WITH GST....................................................................................................1990 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................1991 BANK 1......................................................................................................1991 BANK 2......................................................................................................1993 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................1994 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2000 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2000 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...................................................................................................2001 Component Description...........................................................................................2001 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2001 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2002 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2003 Component Inspection............................................................................................2007 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2007 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2007 ASCD INDICATOR......................................................................................................2008 Component Description...........................................................................................2008 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2008 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2009 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2010 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL..............................................................................................2011 Description.....................................................................................................2011 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2011 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2011 FUEL INJECTOR.......................................................................................................2013 Component Description...........................................................................................2013 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2013 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2014 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2015 Component Inspection............................................................................................2019 FUEL INJECTOR...............................................................................................2019 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2019 FUEL INJECTOR...............................................................................................2019 FUEL PUMP...........................................................................................................2020 Description.....................................................................................................2020 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2020 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2020 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2020 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2021 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2022 Component Inspection............................................................................................2025 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2025 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2025 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2025 ICC BRAKE SWITCH....................................................................................................2026 Component Description...........................................................................................2026 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2026 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2027 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2028 Component Inspection............................................................................................2033 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2033 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2033 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2033 IGNITION SIGNAL.....................................................................................................2034 Component Description...........................................................................................2034 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR............................................................................2034 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2035 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2040 Component Inspection............................................................................................2045 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2045 CONDENSER...................................................................................................2046 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2046 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2046 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................................2047 Component Description...........................................................................................2047 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2048 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2049 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2051 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.................................................................................2051 SNOW MODE SWITCH....................................................................................................2052 Description.....................................................................................................2052 CONSULT-II Reference Value in the Data Monitor Mode.............................................................2052 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2053 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2054 Component Inspection............................................................................................2056 SNOW MODE SWITCH............................................................................................2056 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR.........................................................................................2057 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2057 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2059 Fuel Pressure...................................................................................................2059 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..................................................................................2059 Calculated Load Value...........................................................................................2059 Mass Air Flow Sensor............................................................................................2059 Intake Air Temperature Sensor...................................................................................2059 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor...............................................................................2059 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor 1 Heater............................................................................2059 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater...................................................................................2059 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)................................................................................2059 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)................................................................................2059 Throttle Control Motor..........................................................................................2059 Fuel Injector...................................................................................................2060 Fuel Pump.......................................................................................................2060 VK45DE..................................................................................................................2061 INDEX FOR DTC.......................................................................................................2061 DTC No. Index...................................................................................................2061 Alphabetical Index..............................................................................................2065 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2069 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................2069 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...............................................................2069 On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System of Engine and A/T..............................................................2069 Precaution......................................................................................................2070 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2073 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2073 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2074 ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM...............................................................................................2075 System Diagram..................................................................................................2075 Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) System...........................................................................2076 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2076 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2076 VARIOUS FUEL INJECTION INCREASE/DECREASE COMPENSATION.......................................................2076 MIXTURE RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL (CLOSED LOOP CONTROL)........................................................2077 Open Loop Control.......................................................................................2077 MIXTURE RATIO SELF-LEARNING CONTROL.........................................................................2077 FUEL INJECTION TIMING.......................................................................................2078 Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System..............................................................2078 Simultaneous Multiport Fuel Injection System............................................................2078 FUEL SHUT-OFF...............................................................................................2078 Electronic Ignition (EI) System.................................................................................2078 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2078 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2078 Fuel Cut Control (at No Load and High Engine Speed).............................................................2079 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2079 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2079 AIR CONDITIONING CUT CONTROL........................................................................................2080 Input/Output Signal Chart.......................................................................................2080 System Description..............................................................................................2080 AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)...............................................................................2081 System Description..............................................................................................2081 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CHART...................................................................................2081 BASIC ASCD SYSTEM...........................................................................................2081 SET OPERATION...............................................................................................2081 ACCELERATE OPERATION........................................................................................2081 CANCEL OPERATION............................................................................................2081 COAST OPERATION.............................................................................................2082 RESUME OPERATION............................................................................................2082 Component Description...........................................................................................2082 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2082 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2082 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2082 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2082 ASCD INDICATOR..............................................................................................2082 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................2083 System Description..............................................................................................2083 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM.........................................................................................2084 Description.....................................................................................................2084 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2084 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION LINE DRAWING...........................................................................2085 Component Inspection............................................................................................2087 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................2087 FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)..................................................2087 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2087 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2087 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2087 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2087 EVAP SERVICE PORT...........................................................................................2088 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2088 EVAP CANISTER...............................................................................................2088 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2088 How to Detect Fuel Vapor Leakage................................................................................2088 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2089 WITHOUT CONSULT-II..........................................................................................2089 ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)............................................................................2091 System Description..............................................................................................2091 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2092 SYMPTOM: FUEL ODOR FROM EVAP CANISTER IS STRONG.............................................................2092 SYMPTOM: CANNOT REFUEL/FUEL ODOR FROM THE FUEL FILLER OPENING IS STRONG WHILE REFUELING.....................2093 Component Inspection............................................................................................2094 REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE..............................................................................2094 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2094 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2095 POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION......................................................................................2096 Description.....................................................................................................2096 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2096 Component Inspection............................................................................................2096 PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE..................................................................2096 PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE..................................................................................2097 IVIS (INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS).....................................................................2098 Description.....................................................................................................2098 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (OBD) SYSTEM....................................................................................2099 Introduction....................................................................................................2099 Two Trip Detection Logic........................................................................................2099 Emission-related Diagnostic Information.........................................................................2100 EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION ITEMS...............................................................2100 DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC........................................................................................2104 How to Read DTC and 1st Trip DTC........................................................................2104 FREEZE FRAME DATA AND 1ST TRIP FREEZE FRAME DATA............................................................2105 SYSTEM READINESS TEST (SRT) CODE............................................................................2105 SRT Item................................................................................................2105 SRT Set Timing..........................................................................................2106 SRT Service Procedure...................................................................................2107 How to Display SRT Status...............................................................................2108 How to Set SRT Code.....................................................................................2108 Driving Pattern.........................................................................................2109 TEST VALUE AND TEST LIMIT (GST ONLY — NOT APPLICABLE TO CONSULT-II).........................................2111 HOW TO ERASE EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION........................................................2112 How to Erase DTC........................................................................................2112 Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)................................................................................2114 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2114 ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FUNCTION.........................................................................2114 MIL Flashing Without DTC................................................................................2115 HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE..........................................................................2115 How to Set Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)............................................2115 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................2115 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — BULB CHECK.........................................................................2115 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE I — MALFUNCTION WARNING................................................................2115 DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE II — SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS...........................................................2115 How to Erase Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic Results)..........................................2116 OBD System Operation Chart......................................................................................2116 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, 1ST TRIP DTC, DTC, AND DETECTABLE ITEMS...........................................2116 SUMMARY CHART...............................................................................................2117 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE ” <EXHAUST QUALITY ...........2118 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS FOR “MISFIRE <EXHAUST QUALITY DETERIORATION>”, “FUEL INJECTION S...........2119 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................2119 <Driving Pattern C>.....................................................................................2119 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MIL, DTC, 1ST TRIP DTC AND DRIVING PATTERNS............................................2120 EXPLANATION FOR DRIVING PATTERNS............................................................................2121 <Driving Pattern A>.....................................................................................2121 <Driving Pattern B>.....................................................................................2121 BASIC SERVICE PROCEDURE.............................................................................................2122 Basic Inspection................................................................................................2122 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check............................................................................2127 IDLE SPEED..................................................................................................2127 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2127 With GST................................................................................................2127 IGNITION TIMING.............................................................................................2127 Method A................................................................................................2127 Method B................................................................................................2127 VIN Registration................................................................................................2128 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2128 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2128 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2128 Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning....................................................................2128 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2128 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2128 Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.........................................................................2129 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2129 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2129 Idle Air Volume Learning........................................................................................2129 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2129 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2129 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2129 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2129 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2130 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE........................................................................................2131 Fuel Pressure Check.............................................................................................2131 FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE.......................................................................................2131 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2131 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2131 FUEL PRESSURE CHECK.........................................................................................2131 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS...................................................................................................2133 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction..................................................................................2133 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................2133 WORK FLOW...................................................................................................2134 Overall Sequence........................................................................................2134 Detailed Flow...........................................................................................2135 DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET........................................................................................2137 Description.............................................................................................2137 Worksheet Sample........................................................................................2138 DTC Inspection Priority Chart...................................................................................2139 Fail-Safe Chart.................................................................................................2141 Symptom Matrix Chart............................................................................................2142 SYSTEM — BASIC ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM........................................................................2142 SYSTEM — ENGINE MECHANICAL & OTHER..........................................................................2143 Engine Control Component Parts Location.........................................................................2146 Vacuum Hose Drawing.............................................................................................2153 Circuit Diagram.................................................................................................2154 ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout...........................................................................2156 ECM Terminals and Reference Value...............................................................................2156 PREPARATION.................................................................................................2156 ECM INSPECTION TABLE........................................................................................2156 CONSULT-II Function (ENGINE)....................................................................................2165 FUNCTION....................................................................................................2165 ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENT PARTS/CONTROL SYSTEMS APPLICATION..................................................2166 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................2167 WORK SUPPORT MODE...........................................................................................2167 Work Item...............................................................................................2167 SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE......................................................................................2168 Self Diagnostic Item....................................................................................2168 Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data........................................................2168 DATA MONITOR MODE...........................................................................................2169 Monitored Item..........................................................................................2169 DATA MONITOR (SPEC) MODE....................................................................................2173 Monitored Item..........................................................................................2173 ACTIVE TEST MODE............................................................................................2174 Test Item...............................................................................................2174 DTC & SRT CONFIRMATION MODE.................................................................................2175 SRT STATUS Mode.........................................................................................2175 SRT WORK SUPPORT Mode...................................................................................2175 DTC WORK SUPPORT Mode...................................................................................2175 REAL TIME DIAGNOSIS IN DATA MONITOR MODE (RECORDING VEHICLE DATA)...........................................2176 Description.............................................................................................2176 Operation...............................................................................................2177 Generic Scan Tool (GST) Function................................................................................2177 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2177 FUNCTION....................................................................................................2178 INSPECTION PROCEDURE........................................................................................2178 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor......................................................................2180 Major Sensor Reference Graph in Data Monitor Mode...............................................................2184 CLSD THL POS, ACCEL SEN 1, THRTL SEN 1......................................................................2184 ENG SPEED, MAS A/F SE-B1, THRTL SEN 1, HO2S2 (B1), INJ PULSE-B1.............................................2184 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION VALUE.............................................................................2186 Description.....................................................................................................2186 Testing Condition...............................................................................................2186 Inspection Procedure............................................................................................2186 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2187 OVERALL SEQUENCE............................................................................................2187 DETAILED PROCEDURE..........................................................................................2189 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR INTERMITTENT INCIDENT.........................................................................2196 Description.....................................................................................................2196 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2196 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.....................................................................................2197 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2197 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2198 Ground Inspection...............................................................................................2203 DTC U1000, U1001 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE.............................................................................2204 Description.....................................................................................................2204 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2204 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2204 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2205 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2206 DTC U1010 CAN COMMUNICATION.........................................................................................2207 Description.....................................................................................................2207 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2207 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2207 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2207 WITH GST....................................................................................................2207 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2208 DTC P0011, P0021 IVT CONTROL........................................................................................2209 Description.....................................................................................................2209 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2209 COMPONENT INSPECTION........................................................................................2209 Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve..............................................................2209 Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor.............................................................2210 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2210 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2210 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2210 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2211 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2211 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2211 With GST................................................................................................2211 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2211 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2211 With GST................................................................................................2211 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2212 BANK 1......................................................................................................2212 BANK 2......................................................................................................2214 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2215 Component Inspection............................................................................................2219 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2219 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2220 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2220 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2220 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2220 DTC P0031, P0032, P0051, P0052 A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER..................................................................2221 Description.....................................................................................................2221 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2221 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2221 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2221 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2221 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2221 WITH GST....................................................................................................2221 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2222 BANK 1......................................................................................................2222 BANK 2......................................................................................................2224 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2225 Component Inspection............................................................................................2227 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1 HEATER........................................................................2227 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2227 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2227 DTC P0037, P0038, P0057, P0058 HO2S2 HEATER.........................................................................2228 Description.....................................................................................................2228 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2228 OPERATION...................................................................................................2228 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2228 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2228 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2229 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2229 WITH GST....................................................................................................2229 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2230 BANK 1......................................................................................................2230 BANK 2......................................................................................................2232 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2233 Component Inspection............................................................................................2235 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2 HEATER...............................................................................2235 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2235 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2235 DTC P0075, P0081 IVT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................................2236 Component Description...........................................................................................2236 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2236 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2236 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2236 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2236 WITH GST....................................................................................................2236 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2237 BANK 1......................................................................................................2237 BANK 2......................................................................................................2239 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2241 Component Inspection............................................................................................2242 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2242 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2242 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................................2242 DTC P0101 MAF SENSOR................................................................................................2243 Component Description...........................................................................................2243 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2243 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2243 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2244 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2244 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2244 With GST................................................................................................2244 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2244 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2244 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2245 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2245 With GST................................................................................................2245 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2246 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2247 Component Inspection............................................................................................2250 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2250 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2250 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2250 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2251 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2251 DTC P0102, P0103 MAF SENSOR.........................................................................................2252 Component Description...........................................................................................2252 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2252 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2252 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2252 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2253 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0102.....................................................................................2253 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2253 With GST................................................................................................2253 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P0103.....................................................................................2253 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2253 With GST................................................................................................2253 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2254 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2255 Component Inspection............................................................................................2257 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2257 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2257 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2258 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2258 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2258 DTC P0112, P0113 IAT SENSOR.........................................................................................2259 Component Description...........................................................................................2259 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2259 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2259 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2259 WITH GST....................................................................................................2260 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2261 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2262 Component Inspection............................................................................................2263 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................2263 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2263 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2263 DTC P0117, P0118 ECT SENSOR.........................................................................................2264 Component Description...........................................................................................2264 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2264 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2264 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2265 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2265 WITH GST....................................................................................................2265 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2266 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2267 Component Inspection............................................................................................2269 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2269 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2269 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2269 DTC P0122, P0123 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................2270 Component Description...........................................................................................2270 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2270 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2270 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2270 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2271 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2271 WITH GST....................................................................................................2271 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2272 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2273 Component Inspection............................................................................................2276 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2276 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2276 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2276 DTC P0125 ECT SENSOR................................................................................................2277 Component Description...........................................................................................2277 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2277 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2278 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2278 WITH GST....................................................................................................2278 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2278 Component Inspection............................................................................................2279 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2279 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2279 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2279 DTC P0127 IAT SENSOR................................................................................................2280 Component Description...........................................................................................2280 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2280 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2280 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2280 WITH GST....................................................................................................2281 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2281 Component Inspection............................................................................................2282 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR...............................................................................2282 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2282 MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR........................................................................................2282 DTC P0128 THERMOSTAT FUNCTION.......................................................................................2283 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2283 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2283 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2283 WITH GST....................................................................................................2283 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2283 Component Inspection............................................................................................2284 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2284 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2284 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR...........................................................................2284 DTC P0130, P0150 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................2285 Component Description...........................................................................................2285 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2285 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2285 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2286 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2286 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2287 WITH GST....................................................................................................2287 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2288 BANK 1......................................................................................................2288 BANK 2......................................................................................................2290 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2291 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2294 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2294 DTC P0131, P0151 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................2295 Component Description...........................................................................................2295 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2295 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2295 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2296 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2296 WITH GST....................................................................................................2296 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2297 BANK 1......................................................................................................2297 BANK 2......................................................................................................2299 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2300 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2303 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2303 DTC P0132, P0152 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................2304 Component Description...........................................................................................2304 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2304 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2304 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2305 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2305 WITH GST....................................................................................................2305 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2306 BANK 1......................................................................................................2306 BANK 2......................................................................................................2308 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2309 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2312 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2312 DTC P0133, P0153 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................2313 Component Description...........................................................................................2313 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2313 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2313 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2314 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2314 WITH GST....................................................................................................2315 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2316 BANK 1......................................................................................................2316 BANK 2......................................................................................................2318 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2319 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2324 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2324 DTC P0137, P0157 HO2S2..............................................................................................2325 Component Description...........................................................................................2325 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2325 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2325 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2326 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2326 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2327 WITH GST....................................................................................................2327 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2328 BANK 1......................................................................................................2328 BANK 2......................................................................................................2330 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2331 Component Inspection............................................................................................2334 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2334 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2334 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2335 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2335 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2335 DTC P0138, P0158 HO2S2..............................................................................................2336 Component Description...........................................................................................2336 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2336 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2336 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2337 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2337 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2337 With GST................................................................................................2337 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2337 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2337 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2338 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2338 With GST................................................................................................2338 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2339 BANK 1......................................................................................................2339 BANK 2......................................................................................................2341 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2342 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2342 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2344 Component Inspection............................................................................................2347 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2347 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2347 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2348 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2348 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2348 DTC P0139, P0159 HO2S2..............................................................................................2349 Component Description...........................................................................................2349 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2349 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2349 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2350 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2350 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2351 WITH GST....................................................................................................2351 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2352 BANK 1......................................................................................................2352 BANK 2......................................................................................................2354 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2355 Component Inspection............................................................................................2358 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2358 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2358 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2359 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2359 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR 2......................................................................................2359 DTC P0171, P0174 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................2360 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2360 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2360 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2360 WITH GST....................................................................................................2361 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2362 BANK 1......................................................................................................2362 BANK 2......................................................................................................2364 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2366 DTC P0172, P0175 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM FUNCTION.....................................................................2371 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2371 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2371 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2371 WITH GST....................................................................................................2372 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2373 BANK 1......................................................................................................2373 BANK 2......................................................................................................2375 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2377 DTC P0181 FTT SENSOR................................................................................................2382 Component Description...........................................................................................2382 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2382 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2382 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2382 WITH GST....................................................................................................2383 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2384 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2385 Component Inspection............................................................................................2387 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2387 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2387 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2387 DTC P0182, P0183 FTT SENSOR.........................................................................................2388 Component Description...........................................................................................2388 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2388 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2388 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2388 WITH GST....................................................................................................2388 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2389 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2390 Component Inspection............................................................................................2392 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2392 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2392 FUEL TANK TEMPERATURE SENSOR................................................................................2392 DTC P0222, P0223 TP SENSOR..........................................................................................2393 Component Description...........................................................................................2393 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2393 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2393 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2393 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2394 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2394 WITH GST....................................................................................................2394 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2395 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2396 Component Inspection............................................................................................2399 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2399 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2399 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2399 DTC P0300 - P0308 MULTIPLE CYLINDER MISFIRE, NO. 1 - 8 CYLINDER MISFIRE.............................................2400 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2400 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2401 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2401 WITH GST....................................................................................................2401 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2402 DTC P0327, P0328, P0332, P0333 KS...................................................................................2410 Component Description...........................................................................................2410 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2410 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2410 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2410 WITH GST....................................................................................................2410 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2411 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2412 Component Inspection............................................................................................2414 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................2414 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2414 KNOCK SENSOR................................................................................................2414 DTC P0335 CKP SENSOR (POS)..........................................................................................2415 Component Description...........................................................................................2415 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2415 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2415 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2416 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2416 WITH GST....................................................................................................2416 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2417 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2418 Component Inspection............................................................................................2421 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................2421 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2421 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (POS)............................................................................2421 DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR (PHASE)....................................................................2422 Component Description...........................................................................................2422 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2422 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2422 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2423 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2423 WITH GST....................................................................................................2423 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2424 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2425 Component Inspection............................................................................................2428 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................2428 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2428 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (PHASE)............................................................................2428 DTC P0420, P0430 THREE WAY CATALYST FUNCTION........................................................................2429 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2429 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2429 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2429 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2430 WITH GST....................................................................................................2430 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2431 DTC P0441 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2434 System Description..............................................................................................2434 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2434 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2434 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2435 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2435 WITH GST....................................................................................................2435 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2436 DTC P0442 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2439 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2439 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2440 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2440 WITH GST....................................................................................................2442 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2442 DTC P0443 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.........................................................2448 Description.....................................................................................................2448 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2448 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2448 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2448 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2449 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2449 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2449 WITH GST....................................................................................................2449 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2450 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2452 Component Inspection............................................................................................2455 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2455 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2455 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2455 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2455 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2455 DTC P0444, P0445 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE..................................................2456 Description.....................................................................................................2456 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2456 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2456 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2456 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2457 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2457 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2457 WITH GST....................................................................................................2457 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2458 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2460 Component Inspection............................................................................................2461 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2461 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2461 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2461 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2462 EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...........................................................2462 DTC P0447 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................2463 Component Description...........................................................................................2463 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2463 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2463 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2464 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2464 WITH GST....................................................................................................2464 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2465 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2466 Component Inspection............................................................................................2468 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2468 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2468 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2469 DTC P0448 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE..........................................................................2470 Component Description...........................................................................................2470 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2470 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2470 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2471 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2471 WITH GST....................................................................................................2471 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2472 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2473 Component Inspection............................................................................................2474 EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE............................................................................2474 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2474 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2475 DTC P0451 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2476 Component Description...........................................................................................2476 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2476 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2476 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2477 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2477 WITH GST....................................................................................................2477 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2477 Component Inspection............................................................................................2478 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2478 DTC P0452 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2479 Component Description...........................................................................................2479 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2479 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2479 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2480 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2480 WITH GST....................................................................................................2480 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2481 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2482 Component Inspection............................................................................................2484 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2484 DTC P0453 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.......................................................................2485 Component Description...........................................................................................2485 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2485 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2485 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2486 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2486 WITH GST....................................................................................................2486 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2487 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2488 Component Inspection............................................................................................2492 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................2492 DTC P0455 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2493 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2493 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2494 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2494 WITH GST....................................................................................................2495 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2495 DTC P0456 EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM.......................................................................................2501 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2501 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2502 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2502 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2503 WITH GST....................................................................................................2503 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2504 DTC P0460 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................2510 Component Description...........................................................................................2510 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2510 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2510 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2510 WITH GST....................................................................................................2510 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2511 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2511 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2511 DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR.........................................................................................2512 Component Description...........................................................................................2512 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2512 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2512 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2512 WITH GST....................................................................................................2513 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2513 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2513 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2513 DTC P0462, P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR..................................................................................2514 Component Description...........................................................................................2514 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2514 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2514 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2514 WITH GST....................................................................................................2514 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2515 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2515 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR...........................................................................................2515 DTC P0500 VSS.......................................................................................................2516 Description.....................................................................................................2516 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2516 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2516 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2516 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2517 WITH GST....................................................................................................2517 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2517 DTC P0506 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................2518 Description.....................................................................................................2518 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2518 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2518 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2518 WITH GST....................................................................................................2518 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2519 DTC P0507 ISC SYSTEM................................................................................................2520 Description.....................................................................................................2520 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2520 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2520 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2520 WITH GST....................................................................................................2520 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2521 DTC P0550 PSP SENSOR................................................................................................2522 Component Description...........................................................................................2522 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2522 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2522 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2522 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2522 WITH GST....................................................................................................2522 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2523 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2524 Component Inspection............................................................................................2526 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................2526 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2526 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SENSOR..............................................................................2526 DTC P0603 ECM POWER SUPPLY..........................................................................................2527 Component Description...........................................................................................2527 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2527 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2527 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2527 WITH GST....................................................................................................2527 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2528 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2529 DTC P0605 ECM.......................................................................................................2531 Component Description...........................................................................................2531 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2531 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2531 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2531 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A.................................................................................2531 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2531 With GST................................................................................................2531 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION B.................................................................................2532 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2532 With GST................................................................................................2532 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................2532 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2532 With GST................................................................................................2532 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2532 DTC P0643 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY.......................................................................................2534 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2534 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2534 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2534 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2534 WITH GST....................................................................................................2534 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2535 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2537 DTC P0850 PNP SWITCH................................................................................................2539 Component Description...........................................................................................2539 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2539 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2539 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2539 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2539 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2540 WITH GST....................................................................................................2540 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2541 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2542 DTC P1140, P1145 IVT CONTROL POSITION SENSOR........................................................................2544 Component Description...........................................................................................2544 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2544 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2544 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2544 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2544 WITH GST....................................................................................................2545 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2546 BANK 1......................................................................................................2546 BANK 2......................................................................................................2548 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2549 Component Inspection............................................................................................2552 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2552 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2552 INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL POSITION SENSOR.................................................................2552 DTC P1148, P1168 CLOSED LOOP CONTROL................................................................................2553 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2553 DTC P1211 TCS CONTROL UNIT..........................................................................................2554 Description.....................................................................................................2554 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2554 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2554 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2554 WITH GST....................................................................................................2554 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2554 DTC P1212 TCS COMMUNICATION LINE....................................................................................2555 Description.....................................................................................................2555 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2555 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2555 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2555 WITH GST....................................................................................................2555 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2555 DTC P1217 ENGINE OVER TEMPERATURE...................................................................................2556 Description.....................................................................................................2556 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2556 Cooling Fan Control.....................................................................................2556 Cooling Fan Operation...................................................................................2556 Cooling Fan Relay Operation.............................................................................2557 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2557 Cooling Fan Motor.......................................................................................2557 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2557 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2557 Overall Function Check..........................................................................................2558 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2558 WITH GST....................................................................................................2558 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2560 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2562 PROCEDURE A.................................................................................................2564 PROCEDURE B.................................................................................................2566 Main 13 Causes of Overheating...................................................................................2566 Component Inspection............................................................................................2567 COOLING FAN MOTOR...........................................................................................2567 DTC P1225 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2568 Component Description...........................................................................................2568 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2568 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2568 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2568 WITH GST....................................................................................................2568 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2569 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2569 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2569 DTC P1226 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2570 Component Description...........................................................................................2570 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2570 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2570 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2570 WITH GST....................................................................................................2570 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2571 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2571 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2571 DTC P1564 ICC STEERING SWITCH.......................................................................................2572 Component Description...........................................................................................2572 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2572 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2572 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2573 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2573 WITH GST....................................................................................................2573 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2574 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2575 Component Inspection............................................................................................2578 ICC STEERING SWITCH.........................................................................................2578 DTC P1564 ASCD STEERING SWITCH......................................................................................2579 Component Description...........................................................................................2579 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2579 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2579 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2580 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2580 WITH GST....................................................................................................2580 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2581 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2582 Component Inspection............................................................................................2585 ASCD STEERING SWITCH........................................................................................2585 DTC P1568 ICC FUNCTION..............................................................................................2586 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2586 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2586 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2586 WITH GST....................................................................................................2586 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2586 DTC P1572 ICC BRAKE SWITCH..........................................................................................2587 Component Description...........................................................................................2587 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2587 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2587 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2588 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2588 WITH GST....................................................................................................2588 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2589 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2590 Component Inspection............................................................................................2595 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2595 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2595 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2595 DTC P1572 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH.........................................................................................2596 Component Description...........................................................................................2596 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2596 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2596 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2597 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2597 WITH GST....................................................................................................2597 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2598 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2599 Component Inspection............................................................................................2603 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2603 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2603 DTC P1574 ICC VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR..................................................................................2604 Component Description...........................................................................................2604 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2604 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2604 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2604 WITH GST....................................................................................................2604 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2605 DTC P1574 ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.................................................................................2606 Component Description...........................................................................................2606 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2606 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2606 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2606 WITH GST....................................................................................................2606 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2607 DTC P1715 INPUT SPEED SENSOR (TURBINE REVOLUTION SENSOR)............................................................2608 Description.....................................................................................................2608 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2608 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2608 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2608 DTC P1800 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE...............................................................................2609 Component Description...........................................................................................2609 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2609 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2609 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2609 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2609 WITH GST....................................................................................................2609 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2610 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2611 Component Inspection............................................................................................2612 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2612 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2612 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2612 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2613 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2613 DTC P1805 BRAKE SWITCH..............................................................................................2614 Description.....................................................................................................2614 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2614 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2614 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2614 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2614 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2614 WITH GST....................................................................................................2614 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2615 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2616 Component Inspection............................................................................................2618 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2618 DTC P2100, P2103 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY.......................................................................2619 Component Description...........................................................................................2619 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2619 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2619 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2619 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2619 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2100.....................................................................................2619 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2619 With GST................................................................................................2619 PROCEDURE FOR DTC P2103.....................................................................................2620 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2620 With GST................................................................................................2620 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2621 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2622 DTC P2101 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION........................................................................2625 Description.....................................................................................................2625 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2625 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2625 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2625 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2625 WITH GST....................................................................................................2625 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2626 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2627 Component Inspection............................................................................................2631 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................2631 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2631 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2631 DTC P2118 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR....................................................................................2632 Component Description...........................................................................................2632 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2632 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2632 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2632 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2632 WITH GST....................................................................................................2632 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2633 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2634 Component Inspection............................................................................................2635 THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR......................................................................................2635 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2636 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2636 DTC P2119 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR........................................................................2637 Component Description...........................................................................................2637 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2637 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2637 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2637 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION A AND B...........................................................................2637 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2637 With GST................................................................................................2637 PROCEDURE FOR MALFUNCTION C.................................................................................2638 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2638 With GST................................................................................................2638 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2638 DTC P2122, P2123 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2639 Component Description...........................................................................................2639 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2639 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2639 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2639 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2640 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2640 WITH GST....................................................................................................2640 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2641 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2642 Component Inspection............................................................................................2644 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2644 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2645 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2645 DTC P2127, P2128 APP SENSOR.........................................................................................2646 Component Description...........................................................................................2646 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2646 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2646 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2646 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2647 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2647 WITH GST....................................................................................................2647 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2648 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2649 Component Inspection............................................................................................2652 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2652 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2652 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2652 DTC P2135 TP SENSOR.................................................................................................2653 Component Description...........................................................................................2653 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2653 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2653 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2653 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2654 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2654 WITH GST....................................................................................................2654 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2655 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2656 Component Inspection............................................................................................2659 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR....................................................................................2659 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2659 ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR..........................................................................2659 DTC P2138 APP SENSOR................................................................................................2660 Component Description...........................................................................................2660 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2660 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2660 FAIL-SAFE MODE..............................................................................................2660 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2661 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2661 WITH GST....................................................................................................2661 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2662 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2663 Component Inspection............................................................................................2667 ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR...........................................................................2667 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2667 ACCELERATOR PEDAL...........................................................................................2667 DTC P2A00, P2A03 A/F SENSOR 1.......................................................................................2668 Component Description...........................................................................................2668 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2668 On Board Diagnosis Logic........................................................................................2668 DTC Confirmation Procedure......................................................................................2669 WITH CONSULT-II.............................................................................................2669 WITH GST....................................................................................................2669 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2670 BANK 1......................................................................................................2670 BANK 2......................................................................................................2672 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2673 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2679 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR 1...............................................................................2679 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...................................................................................................2680 Component Description...........................................................................................2680 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2680 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2681 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2682 Component Inspection............................................................................................2686 ASCD BRAKE SWITCH...........................................................................................2686 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2686 ASCD INDICATOR......................................................................................................2687 Component Description...........................................................................................2687 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2687 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2688 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2689 ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL..............................................................................................2690 Description.....................................................................................................2690 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2690 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2690 FUEL INJECTOR.......................................................................................................2692 Component Description...........................................................................................2692 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2692 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2693 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2694 Component Inspection............................................................................................2698 FUEL INJECTOR...............................................................................................2698 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2698 FUEL INJECTOR...............................................................................................2698 FUEL PUMP...........................................................................................................2699 Description.....................................................................................................2699 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2699 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2699 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2699 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2700 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2701 Component Inspection............................................................................................2704 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2704 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2704 FUEL PUMP...................................................................................................2704 ICC BRAKE SWITCH....................................................................................................2705 Component Description...........................................................................................2705 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2705 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2706 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2707 Component Inspection............................................................................................2712 ICC BRAKE SWITCH............................................................................................2712 STOP LAMP SWITCH............................................................................................2712 ICC BRAKE HOLD RELAY........................................................................................2712 IGNITION SIGNAL.....................................................................................................2713 Component Description...........................................................................................2713 IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR............................................................................2713 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2714 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2719 Component Inspection............................................................................................2724 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2724 CONDENSER...................................................................................................2724 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2725 IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR.........................................................................2725 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.........................................................................................2726 Component Description...........................................................................................2726 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2727 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2728 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2730 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR.................................................................................2730 SNOW MODE SWITCH....................................................................................................2731 Description.....................................................................................................2731 CONSULT-II Reference Value in the Data Monitor Mode.............................................................2731 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2732 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2733 Component Inspection............................................................................................2735 SNOW MODE SWITCH............................................................................................2735 VARIABLE INDUCTION AIR CONTROL SYSTEM (VIAS)........................................................................2736 Description.....................................................................................................2736 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................2736 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.......................................................................................2737 Power Valve.............................................................................................2737 VIAS Control Solenoid Valve.............................................................................2737 CONSULT-II Reference Value in Data Monitor Mode.................................................................2737 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2738 Diagnostic Procedure............................................................................................2740 Component Inspection............................................................................................2743 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2743 With CONSULT-II.........................................................................................2743 Without CONSULT-II......................................................................................2744 VACUUM TANK.................................................................................................2744 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2744 VIAS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE.................................................................................2744 MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR.........................................................................................2745 Wiring Diagram..................................................................................................2745 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2747 Fuel Pressure...................................................................................................2747 Idle Speed and Ignition Timing..................................................................................2747 Calculated Load Value...........................................................................................2747 Mass Air Flow Sensor............................................................................................2747 Intake Air Temperature Sensor...................................................................................2747 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor...............................................................................2747 Fuel Tank Temperature Sensor....................................................................................2747 Crankshaft Position Sensor (POS)................................................................................2747 Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)................................................................................2747 A/F Sensor 1 Heater.............................................................................................2747 Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater...................................................................................2748 Throttle Control Motor..........................................................................................2748 Fuel Injector...................................................................................................2748 Fuel Pump.......................................................................................................2748 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 ei..............................................................................................................................2750 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................2750 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................2752 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................2752 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...................................................................2752 Precautions for Work................................................................................................2752 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................2753 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................2753 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................2753 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................2754 Work Flow...........................................................................................................2754 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................2754 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................2755 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................2755 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................2755 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................2755 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................2756 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................2756 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................2756 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................2756 DOORS...........................................................................................................2756 TRUNK...........................................................................................................2757 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................2757 SEATS...........................................................................................................2757 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................2757 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................2758 CLIP AND FASTENER.......................................................................................................2760 Clip and Fastener...................................................................................................2760 FRONT BUMPER............................................................................................................2763 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2763 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2764 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2765 Removal and Installation of Front Fillet Molding Assembly.......................................................2765 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2765 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2765 REAR BUMPER.............................................................................................................2766 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2766 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2767 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2768 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF REAY BUMPER FASCIA..................................................................2768 Disassembly.................................................................................................2768 Assembly....................................................................................................2769 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF REAR BUMPER CLOSING.................................................................2769 Removal.....................................................................................................2769 Installation................................................................................................2769 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF DRAFTER GUARD.......................................................................2769 Removal.....................................................................................................2769 Installation................................................................................................2769 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF REAR FILLET MOLDING ASSEMBLY........................................................2770 Removal.....................................................................................................2770 Installation................................................................................................2770 FRONT GRILLE............................................................................................................2771 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2771 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2771 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2771 COWL TOP................................................................................................................2772 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2772 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2772 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2772 FENDER PROTECTOR........................................................................................................2773 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2773 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2773 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2773 DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING....................................................................................................2774 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2774 FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING......................................................................................2774 Removal.....................................................................................................2774 Installation................................................................................................2774 REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING.......................................................................................2774 Removal.....................................................................................................2774 Installation................................................................................................2774 DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING..............................................................................................2775 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2775 FRONT AND REAR DOOR OUTSIDE LOWER MOLDING.......................................................................2775 Removal.....................................................................................................2775 Installation................................................................................................2775 DOOR PARTING SEAL.......................................................................................................2776 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2776 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2776 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2777 CENTER MUD GUARD........................................................................................................2778 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2778 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2778 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2778 WINDSHIELD MOLDING......................................................................................................2779 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2779 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2779 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2779 BACK DOOR WINDOW MOLDING................................................................................................2780 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2780 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2780 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2780 ROOF SIDE MOLDING.......................................................................................................2782 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2782 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2782 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2782 ROOF RAIL...............................................................................................................2783 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2783 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2783 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2783 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF ROOF RAIL BRACKET...................................................................2783 Removal.....................................................................................................2783 Installation................................................................................................2783 DOOR FINISHER...........................................................................................................2784 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2784 DOOR FINISHER (FRONT AND REAR)..................................................................................2784 Removal.....................................................................................................2784 Installation................................................................................................2785 BODY SIDE TRIM..........................................................................................................2786 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2786 CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH.....................................................................................2786 Removal.....................................................................................................2786 Installation................................................................................................2787 CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH.....................................................................................2787 Removal.....................................................................................................2787 Installation................................................................................................2787 DASH SIDE FINISHER..............................................................................................2787 Removal.....................................................................................................2787 Installation................................................................................................2787 FRONT PILLAR GARNISH............................................................................................2788 Removal.....................................................................................................2788 Installation................................................................................................2788 KICKING PLATE...................................................................................................2788 Removal.....................................................................................................2788 Installation................................................................................................2788 CENTER MUDGUARD FINISHER (FRONT/REAR)...........................................................................2788 Removal.....................................................................................................2788 Installation................................................................................................2788 FLOOR TRIM..............................................................................................................2789 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2789 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2789 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2790 HEADLINING..............................................................................................................2791 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2791 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2792 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2792 LUGGAGE FLOOR TRIM......................................................................................................2793 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2793 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2794 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2794 BACK DOOR TRIM..........................................................................................................2795 Removal and Installation............................................................................................2795 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................2795 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................2795 BACK DOOR OUTSIDE FINISHER......................................................................................2795 Removal and Installation....................................................................................2795 em..............................................................................................................................2796 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................2796 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................2800 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2800 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect......................................2800 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2800 Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant and Engine Oil.............................................................2800 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping.......................................................................2800 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly.........................................................................2800 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement..............................................................2800 Precautions for Assembly and Installation.......................................................................2801 Precautions for Angle Tightening................................................................................2801 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................2801 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................2801 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................2801 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2803 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2803 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2805 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................2808 NVH Troubleshooting — Engine Noise..............................................................................2808 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom...................................................2809 DRIVE BELTS.........................................................................................................2810 Checking Drive Belts............................................................................................2810 Tension Adjustment..............................................................................................2810 ALTERNATOR AND POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT.................................................................2811 A/C COMPRESSOR BELT.........................................................................................2811 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2811 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2811 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2811 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT............................................................................................2812 Components......................................................................................................2812 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2812 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2812 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2812 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2813 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.....................................................................................2813 INSPECTION..................................................................................................2813 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2813 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2813 INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR...........................................................................................2814 Components......................................................................................................2814 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2814 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2814 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2816 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2816 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2817 Part Installation Direction.............................................................................2817 Intake Manifold Collector (Lower).......................................................................2817 Intake Manifold Collector (Upper).......................................................................2817 Water Hose..............................................................................................2817 Electric Throttle Control Actuator......................................................................2818 INTAKE MANIFOLD.....................................................................................................2819 Components......................................................................................................2819 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2819 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2819 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2820 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2820 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2820 Intake Manifold.........................................................................................2820 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST.............................................................................2821 Components......................................................................................................2821 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2821 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2821 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2823 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2823 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2823 Exhaust Manifold Gasket.................................................................................2823 Exhaust Manifold........................................................................................2823 Air Fuel Ratio Sensor and Heated Oxygen Sensor..........................................................2824 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER............................................................................................2825 Components (2WD Models).........................................................................................2825 Removal and Installation (2WD Models)...........................................................................2825 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2825 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2827 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2827 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2830 Components (AWD Models).........................................................................................2830 Removal and Installation (AWD Models)...........................................................................2831 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2831 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2833 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2833 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2836 IGNITION COIL.......................................................................................................2837 Components......................................................................................................2837 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2837 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2837 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2837 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)...................................................................................2838 Components......................................................................................................2838 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2838 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2838 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2838 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2839 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE.........................................................................................2840 Components......................................................................................................2840 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2840 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2840 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2842 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2845 Check on Fuel Leakage...................................................................................2845 ROCKER COVER........................................................................................................2846 Components......................................................................................................2846 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2846 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2846 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2847 FRONT TIMING CHAIN CASE.............................................................................................2849 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2849 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2849 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2853 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2858 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2858 TIMING CHAIN........................................................................................................2859 Components......................................................................................................2859 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2860 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2860 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2867 Timing Chain............................................................................................2867 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2867 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2877 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2877 CAMSHAFT............................................................................................................2878 Components......................................................................................................2878 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2879 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2879 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2880 Camshaft Runout.........................................................................................2880 Camshaft Cam Height.....................................................................................2881 Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance..........................................................................2881 Camshaft End Play.......................................................................................2882 Camshaft Sprocket Runout................................................................................2882 Valve Lifter............................................................................................2882 Valve Lifter Clearance..................................................................................2883 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2883 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2887 Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove........................................................2887 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2887 Valve Clearance.................................................................................................2888 INSPECTION..................................................................................................2888 ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................................2891 OIL SEAL............................................................................................................2893 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal......................................................................2893 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2893 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2893 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal......................................................................2894 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2894 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2894 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal.......................................................................2894 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2894 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2895 CYLINDER HEAD.......................................................................................................2896 On-Vehicle Service..............................................................................................2896 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE...............................................................................2896 Components......................................................................................................2897 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2897 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2897 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2898 Cylinder Head Bolts Outer Diameter......................................................................2898 Cylinder Head Distortion................................................................................2898 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2899 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2900 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2900 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................2901 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................2901 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................2902 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................2903 VALVE DIMENSIONS............................................................................................2903 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE.......................................................................................2903 Valve Stem Diameter.....................................................................................2903 Valve Guide Inner Diameter..............................................................................2903 Valve Guide Clearance...................................................................................2904 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT.....................................................................................2904 VALVE SEAT CONTACT..........................................................................................2905 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT......................................................................................2905 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS.....................................................................................2906 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD......................................................2907 ENGINE ASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................2908 Components (2WD Models).........................................................................................2908 Removal and Installation (2WD Models)...........................................................................2908 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2909 Outline.................................................................................................2909 Preparation.............................................................................................2909 Engine Room.............................................................................................2909 Passenger Room Side.....................................................................................2909 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................2910 Removal Work............................................................................................2910 Separation Work.........................................................................................2911 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2911 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2912 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2912 Components (AWD Models).........................................................................................2913 Removal and Installation (AWD Models)...........................................................................2913 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2914 Outline.................................................................................................2914 Preparation.............................................................................................2914 Engine Room.............................................................................................2914 Passenger Room Side.....................................................................................2914 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................2915 Removal Work............................................................................................2915 Separation Work.........................................................................................2916 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2916 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2917 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................2917 CYLINDER BLOCK......................................................................................................2918 Components......................................................................................................2918 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................2919 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................2919 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................2924 How to Select Piston and Bearing................................................................................2931 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................2931 HOW TO SELECT PISTON........................................................................................2931 When New Cylinder Block is Used.........................................................................2931 When Cylinder Block is Reused...........................................................................2931 Piston Selection Table..................................................................................2932 HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING........................................................................2932 When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used.........................................................2932 When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused...........................................................2932 Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table..................................................................2932 Undersize Bearings Usage Guide..........................................................................2932 HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING..................................................................................2933 When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used.........................................................2933 When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused...........................................................2933 Main Bearing Selection Table............................................................................2934 Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals).................................................................2935 Undersize Bearing Usage Guide...........................................................................2935 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................2936 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY.........................................................................................2936 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE...............................................................................2936 PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE..........................................................................2936 Piston Pin Hole Diameter................................................................................2936 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................2936 Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance......................................................................2936 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE..................................................................................2937 PISTON RING END GAP.........................................................................................2937 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION.............................................................................2938 CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER.............................................................................2938 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................2938 Connecting Rod Bushing Inner Diameter...................................................................2938 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................2939 Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance....................................................................2939 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION...................................................................................2939 MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER.........................................................................2940 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE...........................................................................2940 Cylinder Bore inner Diameter............................................................................2940 Piston Skirt Diameter...................................................................................2941 Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance.......................................................................2941 Re-boring Cylinder Bore.................................................................................2941 CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER............................................................................2941 CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER.............................................................................2942 CRANKSHAFT OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER...........................................................................2942 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT...........................................................................................2942 CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................2942 Method by Calculation...................................................................................2942 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................2943 MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE..................................................................................2943 Method by Calculation...................................................................................2943 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................2943 MAIN BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT...................................................................................2944 CONNECTING ROD BEARING CRUSH HEIGHT.........................................................................2944 MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT OUTER DIAMETER........................................................................2944 CONNECTING ROD BOLT OUTER DIAMETER..........................................................................2945 DRIVE PLATE.................................................................................................2945 OIL JET.....................................................................................................2945 OIL JET RELIEF VALVE........................................................................................2945 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................2946 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................2946 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................2946 DRIVE BELT..................................................................................................2947 INTAKE MANIFOLD COLLECTOR, INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD.............................................2947 SPARK PLUG..................................................................................................2947 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING...............................................................................2948 Valve Lifter............................................................................................2948 Valve Clearance.........................................................................................2948 Available Valve Lifter..................................................................................2949 CYLINDER HEAD...............................................................................................2950 Valve Dimensions........................................................................................2950 Valve Guide.............................................................................................2951 Valve Seat..............................................................................................2952 Valve Spring............................................................................................2952 CYLINDER BLOCK..............................................................................................2953 PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN..........................................................................2954 Available Piston........................................................................................2954 Piston Ring.............................................................................................2954 Piston Pin..............................................................................................2954 CONNECTING ROD..............................................................................................2955 CRANKSHAFT..................................................................................................2956 MAIN BEARING................................................................................................2957 Undersize...............................................................................................2957 Main Bearing Oil Clearance..............................................................................2957 CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................................2958 Undersize...............................................................................................2958 Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance....................................................................2958 VK45DE..................................................................................................................2959 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................2959 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect......................................2959 OPERATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................................2959 Precautions for Drain Engine Coolant and Engine Oil.............................................................2959 Precautions for Disconnecting Fuel Piping.......................................................................2959 Precautions for Removal and Disassembly.........................................................................2959 Precautions for Inspection, Repair and Replacement..............................................................2959 Precautions for Assembly and Installation.......................................................................2959 Parts Requiring Angle Tightening................................................................................2960 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................2960 REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING............................................................................2960 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................2960 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................2962 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................2962 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................2964 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................2966 NVH Troubleshooting — Engine Noise..............................................................................2966 Use the Chart Below to Help You Find the Cause of the Symptom...................................................2967 ENGINE ROOM COVER...................................................................................................2968 Components......................................................................................................2968 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2968 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2968 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2968 DRIVE BELTS.........................................................................................................2969 Components......................................................................................................2969 Checking Drive Belts............................................................................................2969 Tension Adjustment..............................................................................................2969 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2969 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2969 Alternator, Water Pump and A/C Compressor Belt..........................................................2969 Power Steering Oil Pump Belt............................................................................2970 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2970 Components......................................................................................................2971 Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley......................................................................2971 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2971 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2971 AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT............................................................................................2972 Components......................................................................................................2972 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2972 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2972 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2973 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2973 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.....................................................................................2973 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2973 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2973 INTAKE MANIFOLD.....................................................................................................2974 Components......................................................................................................2974 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2975 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2975 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2977 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2977 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2977 Intake Manifold (Lower).................................................................................2977 Intake Manifold (Upper).................................................................................2977 Electric Throttle Control Actuator......................................................................2977 Water Hose..............................................................................................2977 Vacuum Hose.............................................................................................2977 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2977 EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST.............................................................................2978 Components......................................................................................................2978 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2978 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2978 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2980 Surface Distortion......................................................................................2980 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2980 Exhaust Manifold Gasket.................................................................................2980 Exhaust Manifold........................................................................................2981 Air Fuel Ratio Sensor and Heated Oxygen Sensor..........................................................2981 OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER............................................................................................2982 Components......................................................................................................2982 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2982 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2982 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2984 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2984 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2985 IGNITION COIL.......................................................................................................2986 Components......................................................................................................2986 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2986 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2986 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2986 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)...................................................................................2987 Components......................................................................................................2987 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2987 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2987 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................2987 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2988 FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE.........................................................................................2989 Components......................................................................................................2989 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2989 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2989 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2991 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................2993 Check on Fuel Leakage...................................................................................2993 ROCKER COVER........................................................................................................2995 Components......................................................................................................2995 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2995 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2995 INSTALLATION................................................................................................2997 TIMING CHAIN........................................................................................................2998 Components......................................................................................................2998 Removal and Installation........................................................................................2999 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................2999 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3003 Timing Chain............................................................................................3003 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3003 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3009 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................3009 CAMSHAFT............................................................................................................3010 Components......................................................................................................3010 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3010 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3010 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3011 Camshaft Runout.........................................................................................3011 Camshaft Cam Height.....................................................................................3012 Camshaft Journal Oil Clearance..........................................................................3012 Camshaft End Play.......................................................................................3013 Camshaft Sprocket Runout................................................................................3013 Valve Lifter and Adjusting Shim.........................................................................3013 Valve Lifter Clearance..................................................................................3014 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3014 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3016 Inspection of Camshaft Sprocket (INT) Oil Groove........................................................3016 Valve Clearance.................................................................................................3017 INSPECTION..................................................................................................3017 ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................................3019 OIL SEAL............................................................................................................3023 Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal......................................................................3023 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3023 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3023 Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal......................................................................3024 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3024 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3024 Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal.......................................................................3025 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3025 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3025 CYLINDER HEAD.......................................................................................................3027 On-Vehicle Service..............................................................................................3027 CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE...............................................................................3027 Components......................................................................................................3028 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3028 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3028 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3029 Cylinder Head Bolts Outer Diameter......................................................................3029 Cylinder Head Distortion................................................................................3029 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3029 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3031 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3031 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3031 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3032 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................3033 VALVE DIMENSIONS............................................................................................3033 VALVE GUIDE CLEARANCE.......................................................................................3034 Valve Stem Diameter.....................................................................................3034 Valve Guide Inner Diameter..............................................................................3034 Valve Guide Clearance...................................................................................3034 VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT.....................................................................................3034 VALVE SEAT CONTACT..........................................................................................3036 VALVE SEAT REPLACEMENT......................................................................................3036 VALVE SPRING SQUARENESS.....................................................................................3037 VALVE SPRING DIMENSIONS AND VALVE SPRING PRESSURE LOAD......................................................3037 ENGINE ASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3038 Components......................................................................................................3038 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3038 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3038 Outline.................................................................................................3038 Preparation.............................................................................................3039 Engine Room LH..........................................................................................3039 Engine Room RH..........................................................................................3039 Vehicle Underbody.......................................................................................3039 Removal Work............................................................................................3040 Separation Work.........................................................................................3041 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3041 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3041 Inspection for Leaks....................................................................................3041 CYLINDER BLOCK......................................................................................................3043 Components......................................................................................................3043 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3044 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3044 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3048 How to Select Piston and Bearing................................................................................3053 DESCRIPTION.................................................................................................3053 HOW TO SELECT PISTON........................................................................................3054 When New Cylinder Block is Used:........................................................................3054 When Cylinder Block is Reused:..........................................................................3054 Piston Selection Table..................................................................................3054 HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING........................................................................3055 When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used:........................................................3055 When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused:..........................................................3055 Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table..................................................................3055 Under Size Bearings Usage Guide.........................................................................3055 HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING..................................................................................3056 When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used:........................................................3056 When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused:..........................................................3056 Main Bearing Selection Table (No. 1 and 5 Journal)......................................................3057 Main Bearing Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 Journal)...................................................3058 Main Bearing Grade Table (All Journals).................................................................3059 Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide.......................................................................3059 Inspection After Disassembly....................................................................................3060 CRANKSHAFT END PLAY.........................................................................................3060 CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE...............................................................................3060 PISTON TO PISTON PIN OIL CLEARANCE..........................................................................3060 Piston Pin Hole Diameter................................................................................3060 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................3060 Piston to Piston Pin Oil Clearance......................................................................3060 PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE..................................................................................3061 PISTON RING END GAP.........................................................................................3061 CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION.............................................................................3062 CONNECTING ROD BIG END DIAMETER.............................................................................3062 CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................3062 Connecting Rod Bushing Inner Diameter...................................................................3062 Piston Pin Outer Diameter...............................................................................3063 Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance....................................................................3063 CYLINDER BLOCK DISTORTION...................................................................................3063 MAIN BEARING HOUSING INNER DIAMETER.........................................................................3064 PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE...........................................................................3064 Cylinder Bore Inner Diameter............................................................................3064 Piston Skirt Diameter...................................................................................3065 Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance.......................................................................3065 Re-boring Cylinder Bore.................................................................................3065 CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNAL DIAMETER............................................................................3065 CRANKSHAFT PIN JOURNAL DIAMETER.............................................................................3066 CRANKSHAFT OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER...........................................................................3066 CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT...........................................................................................3066 CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE........................................................................3067 Method by Calculation...................................................................................3067 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................3067 MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE..................................................................................3068 Method by Calculation...................................................................................3068 Method of Using Plastigage..............................................................................3068 CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING................................................................................3069 CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................3069 DRIVE PLATE.................................................................................................3069 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3070 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................3070 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................3070 DRIVE BELTS.................................................................................................3070 INTAKE MANIFOLD AND EXHAUST MANIFOLD........................................................................3070 SPARK PLUG..................................................................................................3071 CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING...............................................................................3071 Valve Lifter............................................................................................3071 Valve Clearance.........................................................................................3071 Available Adjusting Shims...............................................................................3072 CYLINDER HEAD...............................................................................................3073 Valve Dimensions........................................................................................3074 Valve Guide.............................................................................................3074 Valve Seat..............................................................................................3075 Valve Spring............................................................................................3075 CYLINDER BLOCK..............................................................................................3076 PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN..........................................................................3077 Available Piston........................................................................................3077 Piston Ring.............................................................................................3077 Piston Pin..............................................................................................3077 CONNECTING ROD..............................................................................................3078 CRANKSHAFT..................................................................................................3079 MAIN BEARING................................................................................................3081 Undersize...............................................................................................3081 Main Bearing Oil Clearance..............................................................................3082 CONNECTING ROD BEARING......................................................................................3082 Undersize...............................................................................................3082 Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance....................................................................3082 ex..............................................................................................................................3084 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3084 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3085 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3085 EXHAUST SYSTEM..........................................................................................................3086 Checking Exhaust System.............................................................................................3086 Components..........................................................................................................3086 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3087 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3087 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3087 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3088 fax.............................................................................................................................3090 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3090 2WD.....................................................................................................................3091 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3091 Special Service Tools (SST).....................................................................................3091 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3091 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................3092 NVH Troubleshooting Chart.......................................................................................3092 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE.........................................................................................3093 On-Vehicle Inspection...........................................................................................3093 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION....................................................................................3093 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3093 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3093 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3093 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3094 Ball Joint Inspection...................................................................................3094 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3094 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3095 Wheel Bearing...................................................................................................3095 AWD.....................................................................................................................3096 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3096 Caution.........................................................................................................3096 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3097 Special Service Tools (SST).....................................................................................3097 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3097 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING................................................................3098 NVH Troubleshooting Chart.......................................................................................3098 FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE.........................................................................................3099 On-Vehicle Inspection...........................................................................................3099 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION....................................................................................3099 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3099 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3099 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3099 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3100 Ball Joint Inspection...................................................................................3100 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3100 FRONT DRIVE SHAFT...................................................................................................3101 Removal and Installation (Left Side)............................................................................3101 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3101 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3101 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3101 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3101 Removal and Installation (Right Side)...........................................................................3102 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3102 Removal.....................................................................................................3102 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3102 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3103 Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)............................................................................3103 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3103 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3104 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3104 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3104 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3104 Shaft...................................................................................................3104 Joint Sub-Assembly......................................................................................3104 Slide Joint Side........................................................................................3105 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3105 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3105 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3107 Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side)...........................................................................3108 COMPONENTS..................................................................................................3108 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3109 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3109 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3109 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3109 Shaft...................................................................................................3109 Joint Sub-Assembly......................................................................................3109 Slide Joint Side........................................................................................3110 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3110 Front Final Drive Assembly Side.........................................................................3110 Wheel Side..............................................................................................3112 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3114 Wheel Bearing...................................................................................................3114 Drive Shaft.....................................................................................................3114 ffd.............................................................................................................................3116 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3116 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3117 Service Notice or Precautions.......................................................................................3117 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3118 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3118 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3120 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3121 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3121 DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................3122 Cross-Sectional View................................................................................................3122 DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL...................................................................................................3123 Changing Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3123 DRAINING........................................................................................................3123 FILLING.........................................................................................................3123 Checking Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3123 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL.......................................................................................3123 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................3124 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3124 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3124 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3125 SIDE OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................3126 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3126 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3126 Right Side:.................................................................................................3126 Left Side:..................................................................................................3126 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3126 Right Side:.................................................................................................3126 Left Side:..................................................................................................3126 FRONT FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3128 Removal and Installation (VQ35DE Models)............................................................................3128 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3128 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3128 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3128 Removal and Installation (VK45DE Models)............................................................................3130 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3130 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3130 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3130 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3132 COMPONENTS (VQ35DE MODELS)......................................................................................3132 COMPONENTS (VK45DE MODELS)......................................................................................3134 ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................3135 Total Preload Torque........................................................................................3135 Drive Gear Runout...........................................................................................3136 Tooth Contact...............................................................................................3136 Backlash....................................................................................................3138 Companion Flange Runout.....................................................................................3138 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3139 Side Shaft Assembly.........................................................................................3139 Differential Assembly.......................................................................................3139 Drive Pinion Assembly.......................................................................................3142 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3143 ADJUSTMENT AND SELECTION OF ADJUSTING WASHERS (SHIMS)...........................................................3144 Differential Side Gear Clearance............................................................................3144 Side Bearing Preload........................................................................................3144 Pinion Gear Height..........................................................................................3146 Pinion Bearing Preload......................................................................................3146 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3147 Drive Pinion Assembly.......................................................................................3147 Differential Assembly.......................................................................................3149 Side Shaft Assembly.........................................................................................3153 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3154 General Specifications..............................................................................................3154 Inspection and Adjustment...........................................................................................3154 DRIVE GEAR RUNOUT...............................................................................................3154 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE................................................................................3154 PRELOAD TORQUE..................................................................................................3154 BACKLASH........................................................................................................3154 COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT.........................................................................................3154 SELECTIVE PARTS.................................................................................................3154 Side Gear Thrust Washer.....................................................................................3154 Pinion Height Adjusting Washer..............................................................................3155 Drive Pinion Bearing Adjusting Washer.......................................................................3155 Drive Pinion Adjusting Washer...............................................................................3155 Side Bearing Adjusting Shim.................................................................................3155 Side Bearing Adjusting Washer...............................................................................3155 fl..............................................................................................................................3156 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3156 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3157 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3157 FUEL SYSTEM.............................................................................................................3158 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................3158 General Precautions.................................................................................................3158 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY..............................................................3159 Components..........................................................................................................3159 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3159 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3159 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3161 Main and Sub Fuel Level Sensor Unit.........................................................................3162 Quick Connector.............................................................................................3162 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3162 Components..........................................................................................................3163 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3163 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3163 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3164 FUEL TANK...............................................................................................................3165 Components..........................................................................................................3165 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3165 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3165 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3166 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3166 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3167 Standard and Limit..................................................................................................3167 FUEL TANK.......................................................................................................3167 fsu.............................................................................................................................3168 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3168 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3169 Caution.............................................................................................................3169 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3170 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................3170 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3171 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3172 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3172 FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................3173 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3173 INSPECTION LOWER BALL JOINT END PLAY............................................................................3173 STRUT INSPECTION................................................................................................3173 Wheel Alignment Inspection..........................................................................................3173 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3173 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................3173 GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS.........................................................................3173 THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS...........................................................................................3174 INSPECTION OF CAMBER, CASTER AND KINGPIN INCLINATION ANGLES.....................................................3174 Using a CCK Gauge...........................................................................................3174 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3175 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3175 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3176 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3177 COIL SPRING AND STRUT...................................................................................................3178 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3178 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3178 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3178 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3179 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3179 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3179 Strut Inspection............................................................................................3179 Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Inspection..............................................................3179 Coil Spring Inspection......................................................................................3179 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3180 TRANSVERSE LINK.........................................................................................................3181 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3181 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3181 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3181 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................3181 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................3181 Swing Torque Inspection.....................................................................................3182 Rotating Torque Inspection..................................................................................3182 Axial End Play Inspection...................................................................................3182 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3182 STABILIZER BAR..........................................................................................................3183 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3183 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3183 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3183 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3183 FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER.................................................................................................3184 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3184 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3184 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3184 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3184 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3185 Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)..........................................................................................3185 Ball Joint..........................................................................................................3185 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*).........................................................................................3185 gi..............................................................................................................................3186 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3186 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3188 Description.........................................................................................................3188 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3188 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect..........................................3188 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3188 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...................................................................3189 General Precautions.................................................................................................3189 Precautions for Three Way Catalyst..................................................................................3190 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Recommended)........................................................3191 Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Premium Gasoline Required)...........................................................3192 Precautions for Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System............................................3192 Precautions for Hoses...............................................................................................3192 HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION...................................................................................3192 HOSE CLAMPING...................................................................................................3193 Precautions for Engine Oils.........................................................................................3193 HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS...................................................................................3193 Precautions for the Environment.....................................................................................3193 Precautions for Air Conditioning....................................................................................3194 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL..................................................................................................3195 Description.........................................................................................................3195 Terms...............................................................................................................3195 Units...............................................................................................................3195 Contents............................................................................................................3195 Components..........................................................................................................3196 SYMBOLS.........................................................................................................3196 How to Follow Trouble Diagnoses.....................................................................................3197 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3197 HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSES..................................................................3197 HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION..............................................................3198 TYPE 1: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Illustration...................................3198 TYPE 2: Harness Wire Color and Connector Number are Shown in Text...........................................3199 KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES............................................................3199 How to Read Wiring Diagrams.........................................................................................3201 CONNECTOR SYMBOLS...............................................................................................3201 SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -................................................................................3202 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3203 Harness Indication..........................................................................................3205 Component Indication........................................................................................3205 Switch Positions............................................................................................3205 Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines...................................................................3206 Multiple Switch.............................................................................................3207 Reference Area..............................................................................................3208 Abbreviations.......................................................................................................3209 SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT.............................................................................3210 How to Check Terminal...............................................................................................3210 CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT..................................................................................3210 HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS.........................................................................................3210 Probing from Harness Side...................................................................................3210 Probing from Terminal Side..................................................................................3210 How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal............................................................3211 Waterproof Connector Inspection.............................................................................3212 Terminal Lock Inspection....................................................................................3212 How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident.......................................................3213 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................3213 INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS.......................................................................................3213 Introduction................................................................................................3213 Vehicle Vibration...........................................................................................3214 Heat Sensitive..............................................................................................3215 Freezing....................................................................................................3215 Water Intrusion.............................................................................................3215 Electrical Load.............................................................................................3215 Cold or Hot Start Up........................................................................................3216 CIRCUIT INSPECTION..............................................................................................3216 Introduction................................................................................................3216 Testing for “Opens” in the Circuit..........................................................................3216 Testing for “Shorts” in the Circuit.........................................................................3217 Ground Inspection...........................................................................................3218 Voltage Drop Tests..........................................................................................3218 Control Unit Circuit Test...................................................................................3220 Control Units and Electrical Parts..................................................................................3221 PRECAUTIONS.....................................................................................................3221 CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM..............................................................................................3222 Description.........................................................................................................3222 Function and System Application.....................................................................................3222 Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement............................................................................3223 Checking Equipment..................................................................................................3223 CONSULT-II Start Procedure..........................................................................................3223 CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit........................................................................3224 INSPECTION PROCEDURE............................................................................................3224 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.................................................................................................3225 LIFTING POINT...........................................................................................................3226 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3226 Garage Jack and Safety Stand........................................................................................3226 2-Pole Lift.........................................................................................................3227 Board-On Lift.......................................................................................................3228 TOW TRUCK TOWING........................................................................................................3229 Tow Truck Towing....................................................................................................3229 2WD MODELS......................................................................................................3229 AWD MODELS......................................................................................................3230 Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle)..........................................................................3230 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION..........................................................................................3231 TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS.....................................................................................3232 Tightening Torque Table.............................................................................................3232 RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS..............................................................................3233 Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants..........................................................................3233 IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION..............................................................................................3234 Model Variation.....................................................................................................3234 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER...........................................................................................3235 IDENTIFICATION PLATE............................................................................................3235 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER............................................................................................3236 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER...................................................................................3236 Dimensions..........................................................................................................3236 Wheels & Tires......................................................................................................3236 TERMINOLOGY.............................................................................................................3237 SAE J1930 Terminology List..........................................................................................3237 gw..............................................................................................................................3242 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3242 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3244 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3244 Precautions for Procedures without Cowl Top Cover...................................................................3244 Handling for Adhesive and Primer....................................................................................3244 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3245 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3245 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3245 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................3246 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3246 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................3246 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................3247 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................3247 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................3247 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................3247 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................3248 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................3248 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................3248 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3248 DOORS...........................................................................................................3248 TRUNK...........................................................................................................3249 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................3249 SEATS...........................................................................................................3249 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................3249 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................3250 WINDSHIELD GLASS........................................................................................................3252 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3252 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3252 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3253 Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield........................................................................3253 BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS..................................................................................................3254 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3254 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3254 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3255 POWER WINDOW SYSTEM.....................................................................................................3256 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3256 System Description..................................................................................................3257 MANUAL OPERATION................................................................................................3257 Front Driver Side Door......................................................................................3257 Front Passenger Side Door...................................................................................3257 Rear Door (LH or RH)........................................................................................3258 AUTO OPERATION..................................................................................................3259 POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK........................................................................................3260 POWER WINDOW LOCK...............................................................................................3260 RETAINED POWER OPERATION........................................................................................3260 ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM...............................................................................................3260 POWER WINDOW CONTROL BY THE KEY CYLINDER SWITCH.................................................................3260 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3261 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3261 Schematic...........................................................................................................3262 Wiring Diagram — WINDOW —...........................................................................................3263 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM................................................................................3267 Terminal and Reference Value for Power Window Main Switch...........................................................3268 Terminal and Reference Value for Front Power Window Switch (Passenger Side).........................................3269 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................3270 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................3270 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3270 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3270 DATE MONITOR....................................................................................................3270 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3271 Trouble Diagnosis Symptom Chart.....................................................................................3271 Check BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit...........................................................................3273 Check Power Window Main Switch Power Supply Circuit.................................................................3274 Check Front Power Window Switch (Passenger Side) Power Supply and Ground Circuit....................................3275 Check Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side) Circuit................................................................3276 Check Front Power Window Motor (Passenger Side) Circuit.............................................................3277 Check rear Power Window Motor (LH) Circuit..........................................................................3277 Check Rear Power Window Motor (RH) Circuit..........................................................................3280 Check Limit Switch Circuit (Driver Side)............................................................................3282 Check Limit Switch Circuit (Passenger Side).........................................................................3284 Check Encoder Circuit (Driver Side).................................................................................3285 Check Encoder Circuit (Passenger Side)..............................................................................3287 Check Door Switch...................................................................................................3290 Check Front Door Key Cylinder Switch................................................................................3292 Check Power Window Serial Link (Passenger Side).....................................................................3294 Check Power Window Lock Switch......................................................................................3296 SIDE WINDOW GLASS.......................................................................................................3297 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3297 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3297 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3298 Repairing Water Leaks.......................................................................................3298 FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR..........................................................................................3299 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3299 DOOR GLASS......................................................................................................3299 Removal.....................................................................................................3299 Installation................................................................................................3300 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3300 Removal.....................................................................................................3300 Installation................................................................................................3300 Inspection after Removal....................................................................................3301 Disassembly and assembly............................................................................................3301 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3301 Disassembly.................................................................................................3301 Assembly....................................................................................................3301 Inspection after Installation.......................................................................................3301 SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH.........................................................................................3301 Setting of Limit Switch.....................................................................................3301 Resetting...................................................................................................3301 FITTING INSPECTION..............................................................................................3301 REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR...........................................................................................3303 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3303 DOOR GLASS......................................................................................................3303 Removal.....................................................................................................3303 Installation................................................................................................3304 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3304 Removal.....................................................................................................3304 Installation................................................................................................3305 Inspection after Removal....................................................................................3305 Disassembly and assembly............................................................................................3305 REGULATOR ASSEMBLY..............................................................................................3305 Disassembly.................................................................................................3305 Assembly....................................................................................................3305 Fitting Inspection..................................................................................................3305 INSIDE MIRROR...........................................................................................................3306 Wiring Diagram — I/MIRR —...........................................................................................3306 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3307 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3307 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3307 COMPASS.........................................................................................................3307 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER....................................................................................................3308 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3308 System Description..................................................................................................3308 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3309 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3309 Schematic...........................................................................................................3310 Wiring Diagram — DEF —..............................................................................................3311 Terminal and Reference Value for BCM................................................................................3315 Terminal and Reference Value for IPDM E/R...........................................................................3315 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................3316 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................3316 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3316 Display Item List...........................................................................................3316 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3316 Display Item List...........................................................................................3316 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3317 Trouble Diagnoses Symptom Chart.....................................................................................3317 Check BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit...........................................................................3318 Check Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit...........................................................................3319 Check rear Window Defogger Power Supply Circuit.....................................................................3320 Check Rear Window Defogger Circuit..................................................................................3322 Check Door Mirror Defogger Power Supply Circuit.....................................................................3323 Check Driver Side Door Mirror Defogger Circuit......................................................................3325 Check Passenger Side Door Mirror Defogger Circuit...................................................................3326 Check Rear Window Defogger Signal...................................................................................3326 Check Filament......................................................................................................3328 Filament Repair.....................................................................................................3328 REPAIR EQUIPMENT................................................................................................3328 REPAIRING PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3329 DOOR MIRROR.............................................................................................................3330 Wiring Diagram — MIRROR —...........................................................................................3330 Trouble Diagnosis...................................................................................................3332 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3333 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3333 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3333 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3333 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3333 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3334 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 idx.............................................................................................................................3336 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3337 A.......................................................................................................................3337 B.......................................................................................................................3337 C.......................................................................................................................3338 D.......................................................................................................................3338 E.......................................................................................................................3338 F.......................................................................................................................3339 G.......................................................................................................................3339 H.......................................................................................................................3339 I.......................................................................................................................3340 K.......................................................................................................................3340 L.......................................................................................................................3340 M.......................................................................................................................3340 N.......................................................................................................................3341 O.......................................................................................................................3341 P.......................................................................................................................3341 R.......................................................................................................................3341 S.......................................................................................................................3342 T.......................................................................................................................3342 U.......................................................................................................................3342 V.......................................................................................................................3342 W.......................................................................................................................3343 ip..............................................................................................................................3344 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3344 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3345 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3345 Precautions.........................................................................................................3345 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3346 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3346 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3346 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................3347 Work Flow...........................................................................................................3347 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................3347 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................3348 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................3348 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................3348 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................3348 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................3349 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................3349 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................3349 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3349 DOORS...........................................................................................................3349 TRUNK...........................................................................................................3350 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................3350 SEATS...........................................................................................................3350 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................3350 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................3351 INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................3353 Component Parts Drawing.............................................................................................3353 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3354 WORK STEP.......................................................................................................3354 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3355 (A) Front Kicking Plate (RH/LH).............................................................................3355 (B) Dash Side Finisher (RH/LH)..............................................................................3355 (C) Front Pillar Garnish (RH/LH)............................................................................3355 (D) A/T Select Lever Knob...................................................................................3355 (E) Instrument Clock Finisher...............................................................................3355 (F) A/T Console Finisher....................................................................................3355 (G) Instrument Side Panel (RH/LH)...........................................................................3355 (H) Center Console..........................................................................................3355 (I) Instrument Lower Cover..................................................................................3356 (J) Instrument Passenger Lower Panel........................................................................3356 (K) Instrument Driver Lower Panel...........................................................................3356 (L) Steering Column Front Lower Cover.......................................................................3356 (M) Steering Column Lower Cover.............................................................................3356 (N) Steering Column Upper Cover.............................................................................3357 (O) Wiper and Washer Switch.................................................................................3357 (P) Lighting and Turn Signal Switch.........................................................................3357 (Q) Steering Lock Escutcheon................................................................................3357 (R) Combination Meter Assembly..............................................................................3357 (S) Cluster Lid C...........................................................................................3357 (T) Display Unit and Audio Unit.............................................................................3358 (U) Front Defroster Grille (RH/LH)..........................................................................3358 (V) Combination Meter Bracket...............................................................................3358 (W) Side Ventilation (RH/LH)................................................................................3358 (X) Instrument Panel and Pad................................................................................3358 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3358 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3359 A/T CONSOLE FINISHER............................................................................................3359 Disassembly.................................................................................................3359 Assembly....................................................................................................3359 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................3360 Disassembly.................................................................................................3360 Assembly....................................................................................................3360 INSTRUMENT PASSENGER LOWER PANEL................................................................................3361 Disassembly.................................................................................................3361 Assembly....................................................................................................3361 lan.............................................................................................................................3362 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3362 CAN.....................................................................................................................3364 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3364 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.....................3364 Precautions When Using CONSULT-II...............................................................................3364 CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II...........................................................................3364 Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3364 CAN SYSTEM..................................................................................................3364 Precautions For Harness Repair..................................................................................3365 CAN SYSTEM..................................................................................................3365 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW.........................................................................................3366 When Displaying CAN Communication System Errors.................................................................3366 WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED BY CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM..................................................3366 WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED EXCEPT CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM..............................................3366 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART................................................................................3367 Diagnosis Procedure.............................................................................................3368 SELECTING CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE SPECIFICATION TABLE)..................................................3368 ACQUISITION OF DATA BY CONSULT-II...........................................................................3369 HOW TO USE CHECK SHEET TABLE................................................................................3370 Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced................................3371 Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced............................3375 CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor..................................................................................3377 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR ECM.......................................................3377 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR TCM.......................................................3378 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR AWD CONTROL UNIT..........................................3379 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR ICC UNIT..................................................3380 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR INTELLIGENT KEY UNIT......................................3381 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR BCM.......................................................3382 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR LDW CAMERA UNIT...........................................3383 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR UNIFIED METER AND A/C AMP.................................3384 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT).............3385 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT..................................3385 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR IPDM E/R..................................................3386 DESCRIPTION OF “CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR” SCREEN FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT......................................3387 CAN COMMUNICATION...................................................................................................3388 System Description..............................................................................................3388 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3388 Schematic.......................................................................................................3389 Wiring Diagram — CAN —..........................................................................................3390 CAN Communication Unit..........................................................................................3393 TYPE 1/TYPE 2...............................................................................................3394 System Diagram..........................................................................................3394 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................3394 TYPE 3......................................................................................................3397 System Diagram..........................................................................................3397 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................3397 TYPE 4/TYPE 5...............................................................................................3401 System Diagram..........................................................................................3401 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................3402 TYPE 6......................................................................................................3405 System Diagram..........................................................................................3405 Input/Output Signal Chart...............................................................................3405 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 1).................................................................................................3410 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3410 Schematic.......................................................................................................3410 Wiring Diagram — CAN —..........................................................................................3410 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3411 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3413 Case 1..................................................................................................3413 Case 2..................................................................................................3414 Case 3..................................................................................................3415 Case 4..................................................................................................3416 Case 5..................................................................................................3417 Case 6..................................................................................................3418 Case 7..................................................................................................3419 Case 8..................................................................................................3420 Case 9..................................................................................................3421 Case 10.................................................................................................3422 Case 11.................................................................................................3423 Case 12.................................................................................................3424 Case 13.................................................................................................3425 Case 14.................................................................................................3426 Case 15.................................................................................................3427 Case 16.................................................................................................3428 Case 17.................................................................................................3429 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 2).................................................................................................3430 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3430 Schematic.......................................................................................................3430 Wiring Diagram — CAN —..........................................................................................3430 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3431 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3434 Case 1..................................................................................................3434 Case 2..................................................................................................3435 Case 3..................................................................................................3436 Case 4..................................................................................................3437 Case 5..................................................................................................3438 Case 6..................................................................................................3439 Case 7..................................................................................................3440 Case 8..................................................................................................3441 Case 9..................................................................................................3442 Case 10.................................................................................................3443 Case 11.................................................................................................3444 Case 12.................................................................................................3445 Case 13.................................................................................................3446 Case 14.................................................................................................3447 Case 15.................................................................................................3448 Case 16.................................................................................................3449 Case 17.................................................................................................3450 Case 18.................................................................................................3451 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 3).................................................................................................3452 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3452 Schematic.......................................................................................................3452 Wiring Diagram — CAN —..........................................................................................3452 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3453 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3457 Case 1..................................................................................................3457 Case 2..................................................................................................3458 Case 3..................................................................................................3459 Case 4..................................................................................................3460 Case 5..................................................................................................3461 Case 6..................................................................................................3462 Case 7..................................................................................................3463 Case 8..................................................................................................3464 Case 9..................................................................................................3465 Case 10.................................................................................................3466 Case 11.................................................................................................3467 Case 12.................................................................................................3468 Case 13.................................................................................................3469 Case 14.................................................................................................3470 Case 15.................................................................................................3471 Case 16.................................................................................................3472 Case 17.................................................................................................3473 Case 18.................................................................................................3474 Case 19.................................................................................................3475 Case 20.................................................................................................3476 Case 21.................................................................................................3477 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 4).................................................................................................3478 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3478 Schematic.......................................................................................................3478 Wiring Diagram — CAN —..........................................................................................3478 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3479 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3482 Case 1..................................................................................................3482 Case 2..................................................................................................3483 Case 3..................................................................................................3484 Case 4..................................................................................................3485 Case 5..................................................................................................3486 Case 6..................................................................................................3487 Case 7..................................................................................................3488 Case 8..................................................................................................3489 Case 9..................................................................................................3490 Case 10.................................................................................................3491 Case 11.................................................................................................3492 Case 12.................................................................................................3493 Case 13.................................................................................................3494 Case 14.................................................................................................3495 Case 15.................................................................................................3496 Case 16.................................................................................................3497 Case 17.................................................................................................3498 Case 18.................................................................................................3499 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 5).................................................................................................3500 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3500 Schematic.......................................................................................................3500 Wiring Diagram — CAN —..........................................................................................3500 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3501 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3505 Case 1..................................................................................................3505 Case 2..................................................................................................3506 Case 3..................................................................................................3507 Case 4..................................................................................................3508 Case 5..................................................................................................3509 Case 6..................................................................................................3510 Case 7..................................................................................................3511 Case 8..................................................................................................3512 Case 9..................................................................................................3513 Case 10.................................................................................................3514 Case 11.................................................................................................3515 Case 12.................................................................................................3516 Case 13.................................................................................................3517 Case 14.................................................................................................3518 Case 15.................................................................................................3519 Case 16.................................................................................................3520 Case 17.................................................................................................3521 Case 18.................................................................................................3522 Case 19.................................................................................................3523 CAN SYSTEM (TYPE 6).................................................................................................3524 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location..................................................................3524 Schematic.......................................................................................................3524 Wiring Diagram — CAN —..........................................................................................3524 Check Sheet.....................................................................................................3525 CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)...............................................................................3529 Case 1..................................................................................................3529 Case 2..................................................................................................3530 Case 3..................................................................................................3531 Case 4..................................................................................................3532 Case 5..................................................................................................3533 Case 6..................................................................................................3534 Case 7..................................................................................................3535 Case 8..................................................................................................3536 Case 9..................................................................................................3537 Case 10.................................................................................................3538 Case 11.................................................................................................3539 Case 12.................................................................................................3540 Case 13.................................................................................................3541 Case 14.................................................................................................3542 Case 15.................................................................................................3543 Case 16.................................................................................................3544 Case 17.................................................................................................3545 Case 18.................................................................................................3546 Case 19.................................................................................................3547 Case 20.................................................................................................3548 Case 21.................................................................................................3549 Case 22.................................................................................................3550 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM........................................................................................3551 Inspection Between TCM and Data Link Connector Circuit..........................................................3551 Inspection Between Data Link Connector and Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit...................................3551 Inspection Between Unified Meter and A/C Amp. and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) C...............3551 Inspection Between ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) and Driver Seat Control Unit Cir...............3552 ECM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3553 TCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3554 Display Control Unit Circuit Inspection.........................................................................3554 AWD Control Unit Circuit Inspection.............................................................................3555 ICC Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3555 Intelligent Key Unit Circuit Inspection.........................................................................3556 Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection..........................................................................3556 BCM Circuit Inspection..........................................................................................3557 Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection........................................................................3557 LDW Camera Unit Circuit Inspection..............................................................................3558 Unified Meter and A/C Amp. Circuit Inspection...................................................................3558 ICC Sensor Circuit Inspection...................................................................................3559 ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection................................................3559 Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection.....................................................................3560 IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection.....................................................................................3560 CAN Communication Circuit Inspection............................................................................3561 IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection......................................................................3562 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT........................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS.................................................................................................... 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)....................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)..................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX.................................................................................... 81 lt..............................................................................................................................3564 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3564 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3568 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3568 General Precautions for Service Operations..........................................................................3569 HEADLAMP - XENON TYPE -.................................................................................................3570 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3570 System Description..................................................................................................3570 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3570 HEADLAMP OPERATION..............................................................................................3571 Low Beam Operation..........................................................................................3571 High Beam Operation/Flash-to-Pass Operation.................................................................3571 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3572 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3572 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)..............................................................................3572 VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM.........................................................................................3572 XENON HEADLAMP..................................................................................................3572 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3572 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3572 Schematic...........................................................................................................3573 Wiring Diagram — H/LAMP —...........................................................................................3574 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3578 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3579 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3580 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3580 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3580 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3582 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3582 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3582 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3582 Display Item List...........................................................................................3582 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3582 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3582 Display Item List...........................................................................................3582 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3583 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3583 Display Item List...........................................................................................3583 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3584 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3584 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3584 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3584 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................3584 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3585 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3585 Headlamp Does Not Change To High Beam (Both Sides)..................................................................3585 Headlamp Does Not Change To High Beam (One Side)....................................................................3587 Headlamp Low Beam Does Not Illuminate (Both Sides)..................................................................3588 Headlamp Low Beam Does Not Illuminate (One Side)....................................................................3591 Headlamp RH Low Beam and High Beam Does Not Illuminate..............................................................3592 Headlamp LH Low Beam and High Beam Does Not Illuminate..............................................................3593 Headlamps Do Not Turn OFF...........................................................................................3594 General Information for Xenon Headlamp Trouble Diagnosis............................................................3596 Caution:............................................................................................................3596 Xenon Headlamp Trouble Diagnosis....................................................................................3596 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3597 PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTING....................................................................................3597 LOW BEAM AND HIGH BEAM..........................................................................................3597 ADJUSTMENT USING AN ADJUSTMENT SCREEN (LIGHT/DARK BORDERLINE)...................................................3598 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3598 HEADLAMP HIGH/LOW BEAM..........................................................................................3598 DAYTIME/PARKING LAMP............................................................................................3599 FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP..........................................................................................3599 FRONT SIDE MARKER LAMP..........................................................................................3599 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3599 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3599 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3600 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3600 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3600 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3600 DAYTIME LIGHT SYSTEM....................................................................................................3602 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3602 System Description..................................................................................................3602 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3602 DAYTIME LIGHT OPERATION.........................................................................................3603 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3603 AUTO LIGHT OPERATION............................................................................................3603 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3603 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3603 Schematic...........................................................................................................3604 Wiring Diagram — DTRL —.............................................................................................3605 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3609 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3611 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3612 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3612 INSPECTION PARKING BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT.........................................................................3613 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3614 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3614 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3614 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3614 Display Item List...........................................................................................3614 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3615 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3615 Display Item List...........................................................................................3615 Daytime Light Control Does Not Operate Properly.....................................................................3616 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3618 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3618 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3618 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3618 AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM.......................................................................................................3619 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3619 System Description..................................................................................................3619 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3619 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3620 DELAY TIMER FUNCTION............................................................................................3620 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3620 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3620 Major Components and Functions......................................................................................3620 Schematic...........................................................................................................3621 Wiring Diagram — AUTO/L —...........................................................................................3622 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3625 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3626 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3626 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3627 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTIONS........................................................................................3627 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3627 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3629 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3629 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................3629 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3629 Work Support Setting Item...................................................................................3629 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3629 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3629 Display Item List...........................................................................................3629 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3631 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3631 Display Item List...........................................................................................3631 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3631 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3631 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3631 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3631 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................3631 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3632 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3632 Symptom Chart.......................................................................................................3632 Lighting Switch Inspection..........................................................................................3632 Optical sensor System Inspection....................................................................................3633 Removal and Installation of Optical Sensor..........................................................................3635 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3635 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3635 HEADLAMP AIMING CONTROL.................................................................................................3636 Schematic...........................................................................................................3636 Wiring Diagram — H/AIM —............................................................................................3637 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3640 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3640 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3640 Switch Circuit Inspection...........................................................................................3640 FRONT FOG LAMP..........................................................................................................3641 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3641 System Description..................................................................................................3641 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3641 FRONT FOG LAMP OPERATION........................................................................................3642 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3642 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3642 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3642 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3642 Wiring Diagram — F/FOG —............................................................................................3643 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3645 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3645 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3646 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3646 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3646 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3647 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3647 Front Fog Lamps Do Not Illuminate (Both Sides)......................................................................3648 Front Fog Lamp Does Not Illuminate (One Side).......................................................................3650 Aiming Adjustment...................................................................................................3651 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3652 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3652 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3652 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3652 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMPS....................................................................................3653 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3653 System Description..................................................................................................3653 TURN SIGNAL OPERATION...........................................................................................3653 LH Turn Signal Lamp.........................................................................................3653 RH Turn Signal Lamp.........................................................................................3654 HAZARD LAMP OPERATION...........................................................................................3654 REMOTE CONTROL ENTRY SYSTEM OPERATION...........................................................................3655 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3656 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3656 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3656 Schematic...........................................................................................................3657 Wiring Diagram — TURN —.............................................................................................3658 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3661 Terminals and Reference Value for Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit................................................3662 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3665 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3665 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3665 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3667 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3667 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3667 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3667 Display Item List...........................................................................................3667 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3667 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3667 Display Item List...........................................................................................3667 Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate...................................................................................3668 Rear Turn Signal Lamp Does Not Operate..............................................................................3669 Hazard Warning Lamp Does Not Operate But Turn Signal Lamp Operate...................................................3671 Bulb Replacement (Front Turn Signal Lamp)...........................................................................3673 Bulb Replacement (Rear Turn Signal Lamp)............................................................................3673 Removal and Installation of Front Turn Signal Lamp..................................................................3673 Removal and Installation of Rear Turn Signal Lamp...................................................................3673 Removal and Installation of Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit......................................................3673 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3673 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3673 LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH.........................................................................................3674 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3674 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3674 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3674 HAZARD SWITCH...........................................................................................................3675 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3675 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3675 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3675 COMBINATION SWITCH......................................................................................................3676 Wiring Diagram — COMBSW —...........................................................................................3676 Combination Switch Reading Function.................................................................................3677 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3677 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3682 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3682 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3682 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3682 Display Item List...........................................................................................3682 Combination Switch Inspection.......................................................................................3683 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3685 STOP LAMP...............................................................................................................3686 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3686 System Description..................................................................................................3686 Schematic...........................................................................................................3687 Wiring Diagram — STOP/L —...........................................................................................3688 Terminals and Reference Value for Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit................................................3691 Stop Lamp Does Not Operate..........................................................................................3691 High-Mounted Stop Lamp..............................................................................................3693 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................3693 Stop Lamp...........................................................................................................3693 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3693 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3693 Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit..................................................................................3693 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3693 BACK-UP LAMP............................................................................................................3694 Wiring Diagram — BACK/L —...........................................................................................3694 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3695 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3695 PARKING, LICENSE PLATE AND TAIL LAMPS...................................................................................3696 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3696 System Description..................................................................................................3696 OUT LINE........................................................................................................3696 OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH....................................................................................3697 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................3698 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3698 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3698 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3698 Schematic...........................................................................................................3699 Wiring Diagram — TAIL/L —...........................................................................................3700 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3705 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................3705 Terminals and Reference Value for Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit................................................3707 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3707 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3707 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................3707 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3708 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................3708 Parking, License Plate and Side Marker Lamps Do Not Illuminate......................................................3708 Tail Lamp Does Not Operate..........................................................................................3714 Parking, License Plate, Side Maker and Tail Lamps Do Not Turn OFF (After Approx. 10 Minutes)........................3715 License Plate Lamp..................................................................................................3715 BULB REPLACEMENT, REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION......................................................................3715 Front Parking Lamp..................................................................................................3716 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3716 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3716 Tail Lamp...........................................................................................................3716 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3716 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3716 Front Side Marker Lamp..............................................................................................3716 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3716 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3716 Rear Side Marker Lamp...............................................................................................3716 BULB REPLACEMENT................................................................................................3716 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3716 Rear Combination Lamp Control Unit..................................................................................3716 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION........................................................................................3716 REAR COMBINATION LAMP...................................................................................................3717 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3717 REAR FENDER SIDE (REAR SIDE MARKER LAMP BULB)...................................................................3717 BACK DOOR SIDE (BACK-UP LAMP)...................................................................................3717 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3717 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3717 Rear Fender Side............................................................................................3717 Trunk Lid Side..............................................................................................3718 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3718 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP......................................................................................................3719 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................3719 System Description..................................................................................................3719 POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND.........................................................................................3720 SWITCH OPERATION................................................................................................3721 ROOM LAMP TIMER OPERATION.......................................................................................3722 Without Intelligent Key System..............................................................................3722 With Intelligent Key System.................................................................................3723 INTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3723 Schematic...........................................................................................................3725 Wiring Diagram — ROOM/L —...........................................................................................3727 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................3735 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................3736 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................3736 CHECK FOR POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT.......................................................................3736 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................3737 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................3737 WORK SUPPORT (INT LAMP).........................................................................................3737 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3737 Display Item List...........................................................................................3737 DATA MONITOR (INT LAMP).........................................................................................3737 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3737 Display Item List...........................................................................................3738 ACTIVE TEST (INT LAMP)..........................................................................................3738 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3738 Display Item List...........................................................................................3738 WORK SUPPORT (BATTERY SAVER)....................................................................................3739 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3739 Display Item List...........................................................................................3739 DATA MONITOR (BATTERY SAVER)....................................................................................3739 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3739 Display Item List...........................................................................................3739 ACTIVE TEST (BATTERY SAVER).....................................................................................3740 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3740 Display Item List...........................................................................................3740 Interior Room Lamp Control Does Not Operate.........................................................................3740 Map Lamp Control Does Not Operate...................................................................................3741 Personal Lamp Control Does Not Operate..............................................................................3744 Ignition Key Hole Illumination Control Does Not Operate.............................................................3745 All Step Lamps Do Not Operate.......................................................................................3747 All Interior Room Lamps Do Not Operate..............................................................................3748 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3748 IGNITION KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION (without inteligent key).........................................................3748 IGNITION KEY HOLE ILLUMINATION (with inteligent key)............................................................3748 FRONT STEP LAMP.................................................................................................3749 REAR STEP LAMP..................................................................................................3749 LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP...............................................................................................3749 VANITY MIRROR LAMP..............................................................................................3749 MAP LAMP........................................................................................................3750 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP..............................................................................................3750 PERSONAL LAMP...................................................................................................3750 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3750 LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP...............................................................................................3750 Removal.....................................................................................................3750 Installation................................................................................................3750 MAP LAMP........................................................................................................3751 Removal.....................................................................................................3751 Installation................................................................................................3751 INTERIOR ROOM LAMP..............................................................................................3751 Removal.....................................................................................................3751 Installation................................................................................................3751 PERSONAL LAMP...................................................................................................3751 Removal.....................................................................................................3751 Installation................................................................................................3751 ILLUMINATION............................................................................................................3752 System Description..................................................................................................3752 ILLUMINATION OPERATION BY LIGHTING SWITCH.......................................................................3752 EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER CONTROL.............................................................................3753 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3754 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3754 Schematic...........................................................................................................3755 Wiring Diagram — ILL —..............................................................................................3757 Bulb Replacement....................................................................................................3766 GLOVE BOX LAMP..................................................................................................3766 A/T DEVICE ILLUMINATION.........................................................................................3766 COIN BOX ILLUMINATION...........................................................................................3766 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3766 ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH.....................................................................................3766 BULB SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................................3767 Headlamp............................................................................................................3767 Exterior Lamp.......................................................................................................3767 Interior Lamp/Illumination..........................................................................................3767 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 lu..............................................................................................................................3768 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3768 VQ35DE..................................................................................................................3770 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3770 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................3770 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................3770 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3771 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................3771 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3771 LUBRICATION SYSTEM..................................................................................................3772 Lubrication Circuit.............................................................................................3772 System Chart....................................................................................................3773 ENGINE OIL..........................................................................................................3774 Inspection......................................................................................................3774 ENGINE OIL LEVEL............................................................................................3774 ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE.......................................................................................3774 ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE..........................................................................................3774 OIL PRESSURE CHECK..........................................................................................3775 Changing Engine Oil.............................................................................................3776 OIL FILTER..........................................................................................................3777 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3777 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3777 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3777 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3777 OIL FILTER BRACKET (AWD)............................................................................................3779 Components......................................................................................................3779 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3779 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3779 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3779 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3780 OIL COOLER..........................................................................................................3781 Components......................................................................................................3781 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3782 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3782 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3783 Oil Cooler..............................................................................................3783 Relief Valve............................................................................................3783 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3783 2WD Models..............................................................................................3783 AWD Models..............................................................................................3783 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3783 OIL PUMP............................................................................................................3784 Components......................................................................................................3784 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3784 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3784 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3784 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3784 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3784 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3784 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3785 Oil Pump Clearance......................................................................................3785 Regulator Valve Clearance...............................................................................3786 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3786 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3787 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................3787 ENGINE OIL PRESSURE.........................................................................................3787 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)...........................................................................3787 OIL PUMP....................................................................................................3787 REGULATOR VALVE.............................................................................................3787 VK45DE..................................................................................................................3788 PRECAUTIONS.........................................................................................................3788 Precautions for Liquid Gasket...................................................................................3788 LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE.........................................................................3788 PREPARATION.........................................................................................................3789 Special Service Tools...........................................................................................3789 Commercial Service Tools........................................................................................3789 LUBRICATION SYSTEM..................................................................................................3790 Lubrication Circuit.............................................................................................3790 System Chart....................................................................................................3791 ENGINE OIL..........................................................................................................3792 Inspection......................................................................................................3792 ENGINE OIL LEVEL............................................................................................3792 ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE.......................................................................................3792 ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE..........................................................................................3792 OIL PRESSURE CHECK..........................................................................................3792 Changing Engine Oil.............................................................................................3794 OIL FILTER..........................................................................................................3795 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3795 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3795 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3795 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3795 OIL COOLER..........................................................................................................3796 Components......................................................................................................3796 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3796 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3796 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL....................................................................................3797 Oil Cooler..............................................................................................3797 Relief Valve............................................................................................3797 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3797 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3797 OIL PUMP............................................................................................................3798 Components......................................................................................................3798 Removal and Installation........................................................................................3798 REMOVAL.....................................................................................................3798 INSTALLATION................................................................................................3798 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...............................................................................3799 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................................................3799 DISASSEMBLY.................................................................................................3799 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY................................................................................3799 Oil Pump Clearance......................................................................................3799 Regulator Valve Clearance...............................................................................3800 ASSEMBLY....................................................................................................3800 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...............................................................................3801 Standard and Limit..............................................................................................3801 OIL PRESSURE................................................................................................3801 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)...........................................................................3801 OIL PUMP....................................................................................................3801 REGULATOR VALVE.............................................................................................3801 ma..............................................................................................................................3802 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3802 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3804 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3804 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3804 GENERAL MAINTENANCE.....................................................................................................3805 Explanation of General Maintenance..................................................................................3805 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE....................................................................................................3808 Introduction of Periodic Maintenance................................................................................3808 Schedule 1..........................................................................................................3809 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.............................................................................3809 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE....................................................................................3810 Schedule 2..........................................................................................................3811 EMISSION COMTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.............................................................................3811 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE....................................................................................3812 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.......................................................................................3813 Fluids and Lubricants...............................................................................................3813 SAE Viscosity Number................................................................................................3814 GASOLINE ENGINE OIL.............................................................................................3814 Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio...................................................................................3814 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VQ35DE ENGINE)......................................................................................3815 Checking Drive Belts................................................................................................3815 Drive Belts Tension Adjustment......................................................................................3815 ALTERNATOR AND POWER STEERING OIL PUMP BELT.....................................................................3816 A/C COMPRESSOR BELT.............................................................................................3816 Changing Engine Coolant.............................................................................................3816 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.........................................................................................3816 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT........................................................................................3817 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.........................................................................................3818 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................3818 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.........................................................................................3819 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE..............................................................................................3819 Changing Engine Oil.................................................................................................3819 Changing Oil Filter.................................................................................................3820 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3820 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3820 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3821 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type).........................................................................3821 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3821 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3821 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3822 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines...........................................................................................3822 ENGINE MAINTENANCE (VK45DE ENGINE)......................................................................................3823 Checking Drive Belts................................................................................................3823 Tension Adjustment..................................................................................................3823 Changing Engine Coolant.............................................................................................3823 DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT.........................................................................................3824 REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT........................................................................................3824 FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM.........................................................................................3825 Checking Fuel Lines.................................................................................................3826 Changing Air Cleaner Filter.........................................................................................3826 VISCOUS PAPER TYPE..............................................................................................3826 Changing Engine Oil.................................................................................................3826 Changing Oil Filter.................................................................................................3827 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3827 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3827 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3828 Changing Spark Plugs (Platinum-Tipped Type).........................................................................3828 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3828 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3828 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3829 Checking EVAP Vapor Lines...........................................................................................3829 CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE............................................................................................3830 Checking Exhaust System.............................................................................................3830 Checking A/T Fluid..................................................................................................3830 Changing A/T Fluid..................................................................................................3832 Checking Transfer Fluid.............................................................................................3832 Changing Transfer Fluid.............................................................................................3833 Checking Propeller Shaft............................................................................................3833 Checking Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3833 Changing Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................3834 Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)..............................................................................3834 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3834 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................3834 Tire Rotation.......................................................................................................3836 Checking Brake Fluid Level and Leaks................................................................................3836 Checking Brake Lines and Cables.....................................................................................3836 Changing Brake Fluid................................................................................................3836 Checking Disc Brake.................................................................................................3837 ROTOR...........................................................................................................3837 CALIPER.........................................................................................................3837 PAD.............................................................................................................3837 Checking Steering Gear and Linkage..................................................................................3837 STEERING GEAR...................................................................................................3837 STEERING LINKAGE................................................................................................3837 Checking Power Steering Fluid and Lines.............................................................................3838 Axle and Suspension Parts...........................................................................................3838 Drive Shaft.........................................................................................................3839 Lubricating Locks, Hinges and Hood Latch............................................................................3839 Checking Seat Belt, Buckles, Retractors, Anchors and Adjusters......................................................3840 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3841 Standard and Limit..................................................................................................3841 BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION (VQ35DE)............................................................................3841 BELT DEFLECTION AND TENSION (VK45DE)............................................................................3841 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VQ35DE)..................................................................3841 ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VK45DE)..................................................................3841 RADIATOR........................................................................................................3841 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VQ35DE)......................................................................3841 ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE) (VK45DE)......................................................................3842 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) (VQ35DE)......................................................................3842 SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE) (VK45DE)......................................................................3842 WHEEL BALANCE...................................................................................................3842 pb..............................................................................................................................3844 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3844 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3845 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3845 PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM....................................................................................................3846 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................3846 PEDAL STROKE....................................................................................................3846 INSPECT COMPONENTS..............................................................................................3846 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................3846 PARKING BRAKE CONTROL...................................................................................................3847 Components..........................................................................................................3847 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3847 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3847 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3848 PARKING BRAKE SHOE......................................................................................................3849 Components..........................................................................................................3849 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3849 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3849 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3850 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3851 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3852 Parking Drum Brake..................................................................................................3852 Parking Brake Control...............................................................................................3852 pg..............................................................................................................................3854 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3854 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................3856 Schematic...........................................................................................................3856 Wiring Diagram — POWER —............................................................................................3857 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN ANY POSITION.............................................................3857 ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ACC” OR “ON”..........................................................3863 IGNITION POWER SUPPLY — IGNITION SW. IN “ON” AND/OR “START”.....................................................3865 Fuse................................................................................................................3869 Fusible Link........................................................................................................3869 Circuit Breaker.....................................................................................................3869 IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)............................................................3870 System Description..................................................................................................3870 SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R..................................................................................3870 CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL..................................................................................3870 Fail- Safe Control..........................................................................................3870 IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL.........................................................................................3871 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................3871 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................3871 Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction....................................................................3871 CONSULT-II Function (IPDM E/R)......................................................................................3872 CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE.................................................................................3872 SELF-DIAG RESULTS...............................................................................................3872 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3872 Display Item List...........................................................................................3872 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................3872 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3872 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................3873 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................3873 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................3873 Auto Active Test....................................................................................................3874 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................3874 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3874 INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE.............................................................................3875 Concept of Auto Active Test.................................................................................3875 Schematic...........................................................................................................3877 IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement.......................................................................................3878 IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection............................................................................3879 Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis).........................................................................3880 Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R................................................................................3881 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3881 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3881 GROUND..................................................................................................................3882 Ground Distribution.................................................................................................3882 MAIN HARNESS....................................................................................................3882 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS.............................................................................................3885 ENGINE HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................3888 ENGINE HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................3889 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................3890 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................3891 BODY HARNESS....................................................................................................3892 BODY NO. 2 HARNESS..............................................................................................3895 ROOM LAMP HARNESS...............................................................................................3896 HARNESS.................................................................................................................3897 Harness Layout......................................................................................................3897 HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT......................................................................................3897 To Use the Grid Reference...................................................................................3897 OUTLINE.........................................................................................................3898 MAIN HARNESS....................................................................................................3899 ENGINE ROOM HARNESS.............................................................................................3902 Engine Compartment..........................................................................................3902 Passenger Compartment.......................................................................................3904 ENGINE HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................3905 ENGINE HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.................................................................................3906 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VK ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................3907 ENGINE CONTROL HARNESS/VQ ENGINE MODELS.........................................................................3909 BODY HARNESS....................................................................................................3911 BODY NO. 2 HARNESS..............................................................................................3913 ROOM LAMP HARNESS...............................................................................................3914 FRONT DOOR HARNESS..............................................................................................3915 LH Side.....................................................................................................3915 RH Side.....................................................................................................3915 REAR DOOR HARNESS...............................................................................................3916 LH Side.....................................................................................................3916 RH Side.....................................................................................................3916 BACK DOOR HARNESS...............................................................................................3917 Wiring Diagram Codes (Cell Codes)...................................................................................3918 ELECTRICAL UNITS LOCATION...............................................................................................3921 Electrical Units Location...........................................................................................3921 ENGINE COMPARTMENT..............................................................................................3921 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT...........................................................................................3922 LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT.............................................................................................3924 HARNESS CONNECTOR.......................................................................................................3925 Description.........................................................................................................3925 HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)............................................................................3925 HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)..........................................................................3926 HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE)..........................................................................3927 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................3928 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3928 SMJ (SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION)...........................................................................................3930 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3930 STANDARDIZED RELAY......................................................................................................3932 Description.........................................................................................................3932 NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS................................................................3932 TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS.....................................................................................3932 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B).........................................................................................3934 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3934 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................3935 Terminal Arrangement................................................................................................3935 pr..............................................................................................................................3936 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3936 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3937 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................3937 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3937 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3938 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3938 FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT...................................................................................................3939 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................3939 APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION.................................................................................3939 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION.......................................................................................3939 Propeller Shaft Runout Measuring Point......................................................................3939 Components..........................................................................................................3939 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3940 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3940 INSPECTION......................................................................................................3940 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3941 REAR PROPELLER SHAFT....................................................................................................3942 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................3942 APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION.................................................................................3942 PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION.......................................................................................3942 Propeller Shaft Runout Measuring Point......................................................................3942 Components..........................................................................................................3943 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3944 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3944 INSPECTION......................................................................................................3945 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3946 Disassembly and Assembly of Center Bearing..........................................................................3947 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3947 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3948 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3949 General Specifications..............................................................................................3949 2WD MODELS......................................................................................................3949 AWD MODELS......................................................................................................3949 Journal Axal Play...................................................................................................3949 Propeller Shaft Runout..............................................................................................3949 ps..............................................................................................................................3950 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3950 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3952 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................3952 Precautions Necessary for Steering Wheel Rotation After Battery Disconnect..........................................3952 OPERATION PROCEDURE.............................................................................................3952 Precautions for Steering System.....................................................................................3952 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3954 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................3954 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3955 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3956 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3956 POWER STEERING FLUID....................................................................................................3957 Checking Fluid Level................................................................................................3957 Checking Fluid Leakage..............................................................................................3957 Air Bleeding Hydraulic System.......................................................................................3957 STEERING WHEEL..........................................................................................................3959 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3959 CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION..............................................................................3959 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY....................................................................................3959 CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL.....................................................................3959 CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE...........................................................................3959 CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE..............................................................................3960 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3960 STEERING COLUMN.........................................................................................................3961 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3961 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3961 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3961 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................3963 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3963 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3963 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3964 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................3964 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3965 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3965 POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE.........................................................................................3966 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3966 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3966 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3967 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION...................................................................................3968 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................3969 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3970 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3972 Boot........................................................................................................3972 Rack........................................................................................................3972 Sub-Gear Assembly...........................................................................................3972 Gear Housing Assembly.......................................................................................3972 Outer Socket and Inner Socket...............................................................................3972 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3973 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP.................................................................................................3978 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................3978 CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE (VQ35DE MODELS)....................................................................3978 CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE (VK45DE MODELS)....................................................................3978 Removal and Installation (VQ35DE Models)............................................................................3979 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3979 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3980 Removal and Installation (VK45DE Models)............................................................................3980 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................3980 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................3980 Disassembly and Assembly (VQ35DE Models)............................................................................3980 INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY...................................................................................3980 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3981 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3981 Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection.....................................................................3981 Cartridge Assembly Inspection...............................................................................3981 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3981 Disassembly and Assembly (VK45DE Models)............................................................................3984 INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY...................................................................................3984 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................3984 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................3985 Body Assembly and Rear Cover Inspection.....................................................................3985 Cartridge Assembly Inspection...............................................................................3985 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................3985 HYDRAULIC LINE..........................................................................................................3988 Components..........................................................................................................3988 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3990 Component...........................................................................................................3991 Removal and Installation............................................................................................3992 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................3993 Steering Wheel......................................................................................................3993 Steering Angle......................................................................................................3993 Steering Column.....................................................................................................3993 Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket..............................................................................3993 Steering Gear.......................................................................................................3994 Oil Pump............................................................................................................3994 Steering Fluid......................................................................................................3994 rax.............................................................................................................................3996 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................3996 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................3997 Caution.............................................................................................................3997 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................3998 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................3998 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................3998 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................3999 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................3999 REAR WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE..............................................................................................4000 On-Vehicle Inspection...............................................................................................4000 WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION........................................................................................4000 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4000 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................4000 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4000 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4001 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................4001 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4001 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4002 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4002 Wheel Bearing...............................................................................................4002 Bushing.....................................................................................................4002 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4002 Wheel Hub...................................................................................................4002 Axle........................................................................................................4002 Back Plate..................................................................................................4002 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4003 Bushing.....................................................................................................4003 Wheel Bearing...............................................................................................4003 INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................4003 REAR DRIVE SHAFT........................................................................................................4004 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4004 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................4004 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4004 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4004 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4004 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4005 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................4005 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4005 Final Drive Side............................................................................................4005 Wheel Side..................................................................................................4006 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4006 Shaft.......................................................................................................4006 Joint Sub-Assembly..........................................................................................4006 Sliding Joint Side (Housing)................................................................................4006 Ball Cage...................................................................................................4006 Steel Ball..................................................................................................4006 Inner Race..................................................................................................4006 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4007 Final Drive Side............................................................................................4007 Wheel Side..................................................................................................4008 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4010 Wheel Bearing.......................................................................................................4010 Drive Shaft.........................................................................................................4010 rf..............................................................................................................................4012 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4012 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4013 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4013 Precautions.........................................................................................................4013 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4014 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4014 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4014 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................4015 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4015 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................4015 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................4016 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................4016 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................4016 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................4016 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................4017 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................4017 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................4017 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................4017 DOORS...........................................................................................................4017 TRUNK...........................................................................................................4018 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................4018 SEATS...........................................................................................................4018 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................4018 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................4019 SUNROOF.................................................................................................................4021 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4021 System Description..................................................................................................4022 TILT UP / SLIDE CLOSE OPERATION.................................................................................4022 TILT DOWN / SLIDE OPEN OPERATION................................................................................4022 AUTO OPERATION..................................................................................................4022 RETAINED POWER OPERATION........................................................................................4022 ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION.............................................................................................4023 MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE..........................................................................................4023 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE........................................................................................4023 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4023 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4023 Wiring Diagram — SROOF —............................................................................................4024 Terminals and Reference Value for BCM...............................................................................4025 Terminals and Reference Value for Sunroof Motor Assembly............................................................4025 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4026 CONSULT-II Function (BCM)...........................................................................................4026 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................4026 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4026 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................4026 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4026 Trouble Diagnosis Chart by Symptom..................................................................................4027 Check BCM Power Supply and Ground Circuit...........................................................................4027 Check Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply and Ground Circuit........................................................4028 Check Sunroof Switch System.........................................................................................4029 Check Door Switch...................................................................................................4031 Wind Deflector Inspection...........................................................................................4033 Link and Wire Assembly..............................................................................................4033 Fitting Adjustment..................................................................................................4033 LID WEATHERSTRIP OVERLAP ADJUSTMENT AND SURFACE MISMATCH ADJUSTMENT.............................................4034 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4034 SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY...........................................................................................4036 Removal.....................................................................................................4036 Installation................................................................................................4037 GLASS LID.......................................................................................................4037 Removal.....................................................................................................4037 Installation................................................................................................4037 SUNSHADE........................................................................................................4038 Removal.....................................................................................................4038 Installation................................................................................................4038 WIND DEFLECTOR..................................................................................................4038 Removal.....................................................................................................4038 Installation................................................................................................4038 SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY..........................................................................................4038 Removal.....................................................................................................4038 Installation................................................................................................4039 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 rfd.............................................................................................................................4040 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4040 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4041 Service Notice or Precautions.......................................................................................4041 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4042 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4042 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4045 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4046 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4046 DESCRIPTION.............................................................................................................4047 Cross-Sectional View................................................................................................4047 DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL...................................................................................................4048 Changing Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................4048 DRAINING........................................................................................................4048 FILLING.........................................................................................................4048 Checking Differential Gear Oil......................................................................................4048 OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL.......................................................................................4048 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................4049 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4049 IDENTIFICATION STAMP OF REPLACEMENT FREQUENCY OF FRONT OIL SEAL.................................................4049 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4049 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4051 SIDE OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................4053 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4053 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4053 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4053 REAR FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY...............................................................................................4055 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4055 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................4055 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4055 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4056 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4057 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................4057 ASSEMBLY INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................4058 Total Preload Torque........................................................................................4058 Drive Gear Runout...........................................................................................4058 Tooth Contact...............................................................................................4059 Backlash....................................................................................................4060 Companion Flange Runout.....................................................................................4061 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4061 Differential Assembly.......................................................................................4061 Drive Pinion Assembly.......................................................................................4063 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4065 ADJUSTMENT AND SELECTION OF ADJUSTING WASHERS...................................................................4065 Differential Side Gear Clearance............................................................................4065 Side Bearing Preload........................................................................................4066 Pinion Gear Height..........................................................................................4067 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4070 Drive Pinion Assembly.......................................................................................4070 Differential Assembly.......................................................................................4072 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4076 General Specifications..............................................................................................4076 Inspection and Adjustment...........................................................................................4076 DRIVE GEAR RUNOUT...............................................................................................4076 DIFFERENTIAL SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE................................................................................4076 PRELOAD TORQUE..................................................................................................4076 BACKLASH........................................................................................................4076 COMPANION FLANGE RUNOUT.........................................................................................4076 SELECTIVE PARTS.................................................................................................4076 Side Gear Thrust Washer.....................................................................................4076 Pinion Height Adjusting Washer..............................................................................4077 Side Bearing Adjusting Washer...............................................................................4077 rsu.............................................................................................................................4078 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4078 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4079 Cautions............................................................................................................4079 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4080 Special Service Tools (SST).........................................................................................4080 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4080 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4081 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4081 REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY................................................................................................4082 On-Vehicle Inspection and Service...................................................................................4082 INSPECTION OF BALL JOINT END PLAY...............................................................................4082 SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION.......................................................................................4082 Wheel Alignment Inspection..........................................................................................4082 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4082 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION..........................................................................................4082 GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS.........................................................................4082 THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS...........................................................................................4083 CAMBER INSPECTION...............................................................................................4083 TOE-IN..........................................................................................................4083 Removal and installation............................................................................................4084 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................4084 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4085 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4085 SHOCK ABSORBER..........................................................................................................4086 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4086 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4086 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4086 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4086 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4086 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4086 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4087 Bound Bumper and Bushing....................................................................................4087 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4087 SUSPENSION ARM..........................................................................................................4088 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4088 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4088 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4088 Visual Inspection...........................................................................................4088 Ball Joint Inspection.......................................................................................4088 Swing Torque Inspection.....................................................................................4088 Rotating Torque Inspection..................................................................................4088 Axial End Play Inspection...................................................................................4088 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4089 RADIUS ROD..............................................................................................................4090 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4090 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4090 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4090 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4090 FRONT LOWER LINK........................................................................................................4091 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4091 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4091 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4091 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4091 REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING...........................................................................................4092 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4092 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4092 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4092 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4092 STABILIZER BAR..........................................................................................................4093 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4093 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4093 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4093 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4093 REAR SUSPENSION MEMBER..................................................................................................4094 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4094 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4094 INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL........................................................................................4094 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4094 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4095 Wheel Alignment (Unladen*)..........................................................................................4095 Ball Joint..........................................................................................................4095 Wheelarch Height (Unladen*).........................................................................................4095 sb..............................................................................................................................4096 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4096 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4097 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4097 Precaution for Seat Belt Service....................................................................................4097 AFTER A COLLISION...............................................................................................4097 SEAT BELTS..............................................................................................................4099 System Description..................................................................................................4099 SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME.........................................................................................4099 SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP..........................................................................................4099 Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt.........................................................................4099 REMOVAL OF FRONT SEAT BELT RETRACTOR............................................................................4100 INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT BELT RETRACTOR.......................................................................4100 REMOVAL OF FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE...............................................................................4100 INSTALLATION OF FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE..........................................................................4100 Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt..........................................................................4101 REMOVAL OF REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTOR.............................................................................4101 INSTALLATION OF REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTOR........................................................................4102 Seat Belt Inspection................................................................................................4102 AFTER A COLLISION...............................................................................................4102 PRELIMINARY CHECK...............................................................................................4102 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE INSPECTION.......................................................................4103 Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)...................................4103 Stationary Inspection for ELR Function......................................................................4103 Stationary Inspection for ALR Function......................................................................4103 Moving Inspection for ELR Function..........................................................................4103 SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE INSPECTION......................................................................4104 LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM....................................................................4105 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4105 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4105 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4105 TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT........................................................................................4106 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4106 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4106 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4106 sc..............................................................................................................................4108 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4108 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4109 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4109 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4110 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4110 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4110 BATTERY.................................................................................................................4111 How to Handle Battery...............................................................................................4111 METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE............................................................................4111 CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL......................................................................................4112 Sulphation..................................................................................................4112 SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK..........................................................................................4112 Hydrometer Temperature Correction...........................................................................4112 CHARGING THE BATTERY............................................................................................4113 Charging Rates..............................................................................................4113 Trouble Diagnoses with Battery Service Center.......................................................................4114 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4114 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4114 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4114 STARTING SYSTEM.........................................................................................................4115 System Description..................................................................................................4115 Wiring Diagram — START —............................................................................................4116 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4116 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4117 Trouble Diagnosis with Starting/Charging System Tester (Starting)...................................................4118 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4119 Check “B” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4119 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4120 Check “S” Connector Circuit.................................................................................4120 MINIMUM SPECIFICATION OF CRANKING VOLTAGE REFERENCING COOLANT TEMPERATURE.......................................4120 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4121 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4121 Removal.....................................................................................................4121 Installation................................................................................................4121 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (2WD)......................................................................................4122 Removal.....................................................................................................4122 Installation................................................................................................4122 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (AWD)......................................................................................4123 Removal.....................................................................................................4123 Installation................................................................................................4123 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4124 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4124 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (2WD)......................................................................................4125 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS (AWD)......................................................................................4126 INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY....................................................................................4126 Pinion/Clutch Check.........................................................................................4126 CHARGING SYSTEM.........................................................................................................4127 System Description..................................................................................................4127 MALFUNCTION INDICATOR...........................................................................................4127 Wiring Diagram — CHARGE —...........................................................................................4128 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4128 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4129 Trouble Diagnosis with Starting/Charging System Tester (Charging)...................................................4130 PRELIMINARY INSPECTION..........................................................................................4131 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4132 Check “L” Terminal Circuit (Open)...........................................................................4132 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4132 Check “L” Terminal Circuit (Short)..........................................................................4132 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3..........................................................................................4132 Check “S” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4132 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4..........................................................................................4133 Check “B” Terminal Circuit..................................................................................4133 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4134 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4134 Removal.....................................................................................................4134 Alternator Pulley Inspection................................................................................4135 Installation................................................................................................4135 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4135 Removal.....................................................................................................4135 Alternator Pulley Inspection................................................................................4136 Installation................................................................................................4136 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4137 VK45DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4137 VQ35DE ENGINE MODELS............................................................................................4138 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4139 Battery.............................................................................................................4139 Starter.............................................................................................................4139 Alternator..........................................................................................................4139 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 se..............................................................................................................................4140 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4140 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4142 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4142 Service Notice......................................................................................................4142 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4143 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4143 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4143 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.....................................................................................4144 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4144 CUSTOMER INTERVIEW..............................................................................................4144 DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE..............................................................................4145 CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS.................................................................................4145 LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE....................................................................4145 REPAIR THE CAUSE................................................................................................4145 CONFIRM THE REPAIR..............................................................................................4146 Generic Squeak and Rattle Troubleshooting...........................................................................4146 INSTRUMENT PANEL................................................................................................4146 CENTER CONSOLE..................................................................................................4146 DOORS...........................................................................................................4146 TRUNK...........................................................................................................4147 SUNROOF/HEADLINING..............................................................................................4147 SEATS...........................................................................................................4147 UNDERHOOD.......................................................................................................4147 Diagnostic Worksheet................................................................................................4148 AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER..............................................................................................4150 System Description..................................................................................................4150 MANUAL OPERATION................................................................................................4150 AUTOMATIC OPERATION.............................................................................................4150 MEMORY STORING AND KEYFOB INTERLOCK STORING.....................................................................4151 MEMORY SWITCH OPERATION.........................................................................................4152 ENTRY OPERATION.................................................................................................4152 EXITING OPERATION...............................................................................................4152 KEYFOB INTERLOCK OPERATION......................................................................................4153 FAIL- SAFE MODE.................................................................................................4153 CANCEL OF FAIL-SAFE MODE........................................................................................4153 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4154 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4155 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4155 Schematic...........................................................................................................4156 Wiring Diagram — AUT/DP —...........................................................................................4158 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4170 Terminals and Reference Values for Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit..........................................4170 Terminals and Reference Values for Driver Seat Control Unit.........................................................4172 Work Flow...........................................................................................................4175 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4175 SETTING CHANGE FUNCTION.........................................................................................4175 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND...................................................................................4176 CONSULT-II Function (AUTO DRIVE POS.)...............................................................................4178 CONSULT-II OPERATION............................................................................................4178 SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS..........................................................................................4178 Display Item List...........................................................................................4178 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4179 Selection from Menu.........................................................................................4179 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4180 Display Item List...........................................................................................4180 Check CAN Communication System......................................................................................4181 Symptom Chart.......................................................................................................4181 Check Sliding Motor Circuit.........................................................................................4182 Check Reclining Motor Circuit.......................................................................................4184 Check Front Lifting Motor Circuit...................................................................................4185 Check Rear Lifting Motor Circuit....................................................................................4186 Check Telescopic Motor Circuit......................................................................................4188 Check Tilt Motor Circuit............................................................................................4189 Check Driver Side Mirror Motor Circuit..............................................................................4190 Check Passenger Side Mirror Motor Circuit...........................................................................4192 Check Sliding Sensor Circuit........................................................................................4194 Check Reclining Sensor Circuit......................................................................................4195 Check Front Lifting Sensor Circuit..................................................................................4196 Check Rear Lifting Sensor Circuit...................................................................................4197 Check Telescopic Sensor Circuit.....................................................................................4198 Check Tilt Sensor Circuit...........................................................................................4199 Check Driver Side Mirror Sensor Circuit.............................................................................4200 Check Passenger Side Mirror Sensor Circuit..........................................................................4201 Check Steering and Door Mirror Sensor Power Supply and Ground Circuit...............................................4203 Check Front Door Switch (Driver Side) Circuit.......................................................................4204 Check Sliding Switch Circuit........................................................................................4206 Check Reclining Switch..............................................................................................4207 Check Front Lifting Switch Circuit..................................................................................4209 Check Rear Lifting Switch Circuit...................................................................................4210 Check Power Seat Switch Ground Circuit..............................................................................4211 Check Telescopic Switch Circuit.....................................................................................4212 Check Tilt Switch Circuit...........................................................................................4214 Check Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit.................................................4216 Check Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit.....................................................4218 Check Detention Switch (P Range Switch) Circuit.....................................................................4220 Check Key Switch Circuit (With Intelligent Key).....................................................................4221 Check Key Switch Circuit (Without Intelligent Key)..................................................................4223 Check Seat Memory Switch Circuit....................................................................................4224 Check Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit............................................................................4226 Check UART Communication Line Circuit...............................................................................4227 Check Lumbar Support Circuit........................................................................................4229 POWER SEAT..............................................................................................................4231 Wiring Diagram — SEAT —.............................................................................................4231 HEATED SEAT.............................................................................................................4233 Description.........................................................................................................4233 Wiring Diagram — HSEAT —............................................................................................4234 FRONT SEAT..............................................................................................................4236 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4236 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4239 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4241 REMOVAL OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD................................................................................4241 INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD...........................................................................4242 REMOVAL OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD............................................................................4242 INSTALLATION OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD.......................................................................4243 REAR SEAT...............................................................................................................4244 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4244 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4246 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4246 REMOVAL OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD............................................................................4246 INSTALLATION OF SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD.......................................................................4247 REMOVAL OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD................................................................................4247 INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD...........................................................................4247 REMOVAL OF REMOTE CONTROL LEVER.................................................................................4248 INSTALLATION OF REMOTE CONTROL LEVER............................................................................4248 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 srs.............................................................................................................................4250 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4250 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4252 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4252 Precautions for SRS “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER” Service.................................................4252 Occupant Classification System Precaution...........................................................................4252 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4253 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4253 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS).....................................................................................4254 SRS Configuration...................................................................................................4254 Front Seat Belt Pre-Tensioner with Load Limiter.....................................................................4255 Front Side Air Bag..................................................................................................4255 Side Curtain Air Bag................................................................................................4255 Occupant Classification System (OCS)................................................................................4256 Passenger Air Bag Status Condition..................................................................................4256 Component Parts of Occupant Classification System...................................................................4256 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.......................................................................................................4257 Trouble Diagnosis Introduction......................................................................................4257 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION..............................................................................................4257 HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR..................................................4257 Information from Customer...................................................................................4257 Preliminary Check...........................................................................................4257 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4258 Component Parts Location............................................................................................4259 Schematic...........................................................................................................4260 Wiring Diagram — SRS —..............................................................................................4261 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................4266 DIAGNOSIS MODE FOR CONSULT-II...................................................................................4266 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITH CONSULT-II...............................................................4266 From User Mode to Diagnosis Mode............................................................................4266 From Diagnosis Mode to User Mode............................................................................4266 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS............................................................................4267 Self-Diagnosis Function (Without CONSULT-II)........................................................................4267 HOW TO CHANGE SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODE WITHOUT CONSULT-II............................................................4267 HOW TO ERASE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS.............................................................................4267 SRS Operation Check.................................................................................................4268 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 1..........................................................................................4268 Checking Air Bag Operation by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp — User Mode......................................4268 Trouble Diagnosis with CONSULT-II...................................................................................4270 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2..........................................................................................4270 CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG [CURRENT]”)....................................................4271 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 3..........................................................................................4274 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 4 (CONTINUED FROM DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 2)..................................................4276 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 5..........................................................................................4276 CONSULT-II Diagnostic Code Chart (“SELF-DIAG [PAST]” or “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”)..............................4277 Trouble Diagnosis without CONSULT-II................................................................................4281 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 6..........................................................................................4281 Inspecting SRS Malfunctioning Parts by Using “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp — Diagnosis Mode........................4281 WARNING LAMP FLASH CODE CHART...................................................................................4281 Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn OFF.........................................................4285 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 7..........................................................................................4285 Trouble Diagnosis: “AIR BAG” Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON..........................................................4286 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE 8..........................................................................................4286 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE...................................................................................................4287 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4287 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4287 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4288 SPIRAL CABLE............................................................................................................4289 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4289 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4289 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4289 FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE..........................................................................................4291 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4291 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4291 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4292 SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE.............................................................................................4293 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4293 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4293 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4294 CRASH ZONE SENSOR.......................................................................................................4295 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4295 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4295 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4295 SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR.........................................................................................4296 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4296 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4296 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4296 FRONT SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER...........................................................................................4297 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4297 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT...................................................................................................4298 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4298 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4298 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4298 ECU DISCRIMINATED NO............................................................................................4298 COLLISION DIAGNOSIS.....................................................................................................4299 For Frontal Collision...............................................................................................4299 SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)..........................................................................4299 For Side Collision..................................................................................................4301 WHEN THE SIDE AIR BAG IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION:.......................................................4301 WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE COLLISION:................................................................4301 SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE COLLISION).............................................................................4301 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 tf..............................................................................................................................4304 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4304 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4306 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4306 Precautions.........................................................................................................4306 Service Notice or Precautions.......................................................................................4307 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4308 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4308 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4310 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4311 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4311 TRANSFER FLUID..........................................................................................................4312 Replacement.........................................................................................................4312 DRAINING........................................................................................................4312 FILLING.........................................................................................................4312 Inspection..........................................................................................................4312 FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL...................................................................................4312 AWD SYSTEM..............................................................................................................4313 Power Transfer Diagram..............................................................................................4313 System Description..................................................................................................4313 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4313 ELECTRIC CONTROLLED COUPLING....................................................................................4314 Operation Principle.........................................................................................4314 AWD CONTROL UNIT................................................................................................4314 AWD WARNING LAMP................................................................................................4315 AWD Warning Lamp Indication.................................................................................4315 System Diagram......................................................................................................4315 COMPONENTS FUNCTION DESCRIPTION.................................................................................4316 CAN Communication...................................................................................................4316 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION..............................................................................................4316 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS.......................................................................................................4317 Fail-Safe Function..................................................................................................4317 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis....................................................................................4317 BASIC CONCEPT...................................................................................................4317 Location of Electrical Parts........................................................................................4318 Circuit Diagram.....................................................................................................4319 Wiring Diagram — AWD —..............................................................................................4320 Trouble Diagnosis Chart for Symptoms................................................................................4323 AWD Control Unit Input/Output Signal Reference Values...............................................................4323 AWD CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION TABLE...............................................................................4323 Specifications with CONSULT-II..............................................................................4323 CONSULT-II Function (ALL MODE AWD/4WD)..............................................................................4325 FUNCTION........................................................................................................4325 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE....................................................................................4325 SELF-DIAG RESULT MODE...........................................................................................4325 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4325 Display Item List...........................................................................................4325 How to Erase Self-Diagnostic Results........................................................................4326 DATA MONITOR MODE...............................................................................................4327 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4327 Display Item List...........................................................................................4327 ACTIVE TEST MODE................................................................................................4328 Description.................................................................................................4328 Test Item...................................................................................................4328 AWD CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBER....................................................................................4328 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYSTEM............................................................................................4329 Power Supply Circuit for AWD Control Unit...........................................................................4329 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE.................................................................4329 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4329 AWD Control Unit....................................................................................................4330 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4330 ABS System..........................................................................................................4330 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4330 AWD Solenoid........................................................................................................4331 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE.................................................................4331 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4331 COMPONENT INSPECTION............................................................................................4333 AWD Actuator Relay..................................................................................................4334 CONSULT-II REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR MODE.................................................................4334 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4334 Engine Control Signal...............................................................................................4335 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4335 CAN Communication Line..............................................................................................4335 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4335 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS..........................................................................................4336 AWD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn ON When The Ignition Switch Is Turned to ON..........................................4336 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4336 AWD Warning Lamp Does Not Turn OFF Several Seconds after Engine Started.............................................4336 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4336 Heavy Tight-Corner Braking Symptom Occurs When The Vehicle Is Driven and The Steering Wheel Is Tu...................4338 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4338 Vehicle Does Not Enter AWD Mode Even Though AWD Warning Lamp Turned to OFF..........................................4339 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4339 While Driving, AWD Warning Lamp Flashes Rapidly (When Flashing in Approx. 1 Minute and Then Turni...................4340 While Driving, AWD Warning Lamp Flashes Slowly (When Continuing to Flash until Turning Ignition S...................4340 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE............................................................................................4340 AWD CONTROL UNIT........................................................................................................4342 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4342 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4342 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4342 FRONT OIL SEAL..........................................................................................................4343 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4343 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4343 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4343 REAR OIL SEAL...........................................................................................................4344 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4344 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4344 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4345 AIR BREATHER HOSE.......................................................................................................4346 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4346 TRANSFER ASSEMBLY.......................................................................................................4347 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4347 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4347 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4347 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................4348 COMPONENTS......................................................................................................4348 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4349 Front Case and Rear Case....................................................................................4349 Mainshaft Assembly..........................................................................................4353 Front Drive Shaft and Drive Chain...........................................................................4353 INSPECTION......................................................................................................4354 Cases.......................................................................................................4354 Bearing.....................................................................................................4354 Shaft.......................................................................................................4354 Gears and Chain.............................................................................................4354 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4355 Front Drive Shaft and Drive Chain...........................................................................4355 Mainshaft Assembly..........................................................................................4356 Front Case and Rear Case....................................................................................4356 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)...................................................................................4362 General Specifications..............................................................................................4362 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 wt..............................................................................................................................4364 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4364 PRECAUTIONS.............................................................................................................4366 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4366 Precautions.........................................................................................................4366 Service Notice or Precautions.......................................................................................4367 PREPARATION.............................................................................................................4368 Special Service Tools...............................................................................................4368 Commercial Service Tools............................................................................................4368 NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................4369 NVH Troubleshooting Chart...........................................................................................4369 ROAD WHEEL..............................................................................................................4370 Inspection..........................................................................................................4370 ALUMINUM WHEEL..................................................................................................4370 STEEL WHEEL.....................................................................................................4370 ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY................................................................................................4371 Balancing Wheels (Bonding Weight Type)..............................................................................4371 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4371 WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT........................................................................................4371 Tire Rotation.......................................................................................................4372 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM........................................................................................4373 System Components...................................................................................................4373 System Description..................................................................................................4373 TRANSMITTER.....................................................................................................4373 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER...................................................................................4373 BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE).......................................................................................4374 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP..................................................................................4374 Low Tire pressure Warning Lamp Indication...................................................................4374 DISPLAY UNIT....................................................................................................4374 CAN COMMUNICATION.......................................................................................................4375 System Description..................................................................................................4375 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES.......................................................................................................4376 Schematic...........................................................................................................4376 Wiring Diagram — T/WARN —...........................................................................................4377 Control Unit Input/Output Signal Standard...........................................................................4380 ID Registration Procedure...........................................................................................4381 ID REGISTRATION WITH ACTIVATION TOOL............................................................................4381 ID REGISTRATION WITHOUT ACTIVATION TOOL.........................................................................4382 Transmitter Wake Up Operation.......................................................................................4383 WITH ACTIVATION TOOL............................................................................................4383 Self-Diagnosis......................................................................................................4384 DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................................4384 FUNCTION........................................................................................................4384 LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DIAGNOSTIC CHART.................................................................4384 CONSULT-II Function.................................................................................................4385 FUNCTION........................................................................................................4385 CONSULT-II SETTING PROCEDURE....................................................................................4385 WORK SUPPORT MODE...............................................................................................4386 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4386 Test Item...................................................................................................4386 ID Read.....................................................................................................4386 ID Regist...................................................................................................4386 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MODE....................................................................................4386 DATA MONITOR MODE...............................................................................................4387 ACTIVE TEST MODE................................................................................................4387 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4387 Test Item...................................................................................................4387 Flasher.....................................................................................................4388 Horn........................................................................................................4388 Warning Lamp................................................................................................4388 ID Regist Warning...........................................................................................4388 Flat Tire Warning...........................................................................................4389 How to Perform Trouble Diagnosis for Quick and Accurate Repair......................................................4390 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................4390 WORK FLOW.......................................................................................................4390 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4391 Malfunction Code/Symptom Chart......................................................................................4392 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SELF-DIAGNOSTIC ITEMS.............................................................................4393 Inspection 1: Transmitter or Control Unit (BCM).....................................................................4393 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 21, 22, 23 OR 24...........................................................................4393 Inspection 2: Transmitter - 1.......................................................................................4393 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 31, 32, 33, 34, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 47 OR 48...........................................4393 Inspection 3: Transmitter - 2.......................................................................................4394 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 35, 36, 37 OR 38...........................................................................4394 Inspection 4: Vehicle Speed Signal..................................................................................4395 MALFUNCTION CODE NO. 52.........................................................................................4395 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR SYMPTOMS..........................................................................................4396 Inspection 1: Warning Lamp Does Not Come On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On.......................................4396 Inspection 2: Warning Lamp Stays On When Ignition Switch Is Turned On...............................................4396 Inspection 3: Warning Lamp Blinks When Ignition Switch Is Turned On.................................................4398 Inspection 4: Turn Signal Lamp Blinks When Ignition Switch Is Turned On.............................................4399 Inspection 5: ID Registration Can Not Be Completed..................................................................4399 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION................................................................................................4400 Transmitter.........................................................................................................4400 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4400 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4400 SERVICE DATA............................................................................................................4402 Road Wheel..........................................................................................................4402 Tire................................................................................................................4402 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81 ww..............................................................................................................................4404 QUICK REFERENCE INDEX....................................................................................................... 0 Table of Contents...........................................................................................................4404 PRECAUTION..............................................................................................................4406 Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”.........................4406 FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM...........................................................................................4407 Components Parts and Harness Connector Location.....................................................................4407 System Description..................................................................................................4407 OUT LINE........................................................................................................4407 LOW SPEED WIPER OPERATION.......................................................................................4408 HI SPEED WIPER OPERATION........................................................................................4408 INTERMITTENT OPERATION..........................................................................................4408 Wiper Dial Position Setting.................................................................................4409 AUTO STOP OPERATION.............................................................................................4409 WASHER OPERATION................................................................................................4409 MIST OPERATION..................................................................................................4409 FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION..............................................................................................4410 COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION.............................................................................4411 Description.................................................................................................4411 Operation Description.......................................................................................4411 BCM - Operation Table of Combination Switches...............................................................4412 Sample Operation: (When Wiper Switch Turned to LOW Position)................................................4412 Operation Mode..............................................................................................4413 CAN Communication System Description................................................................................4413 CAN Communication Unit..............................................................................................4413 Schematic...........................................................................................................4414 Wiring Diagram — WIPER —............................................................................................4415 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4418 Terminals and Reference Values for IPDM E/R.........................................................................4421 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4422 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4422 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................4422 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................4423 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................4423 WORK SUPPORT....................................................................................................4423 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4423 Display Item List...........................................................................................4423 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4423 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4423 Display Item List...........................................................................................4423 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4424 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4424 Display Item List...........................................................................................4424 CONSULT-II Functions (IPDM E/R).....................................................................................4425 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................4425 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4425 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4425 All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu..............................................................4425 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4425 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4425 Front Wiper Does Not Operate........................................................................................4426 Front Wiper Does Not Return to Stop Position........................................................................4428 Only Front Wiper Low Does Not Operate...............................................................................4429 Only Front Wiper Hi Does Not Operate................................................................................4431 Only Front Wiper Intermittent Does Not Operate......................................................................4432 Front Wiper Interval Time Is Not Controlled by Vehicle Speed........................................................4432 Front Wiper Intermittent Operation Switch Position Cannot Be Adjusted...............................................4433 Wiper Does Not Wipe When Front Washer Operates......................................................................4433 After Front Wiper Operate for 10 Seconds, They Stop for 20 Seconds, and After Repeating the Opera...................4434 Front Wiper Does Not Stop...........................................................................................4435 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Arms, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location................................4436 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4436 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4436 ADJUSTMENT......................................................................................................4436 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper Drive Assembly..............................................................4436 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4436 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4436 Disassembly and Assembly of Front Wiper Drive Assembly..............................................................4437 DISASSEMBLY.....................................................................................................4437 ASSEMBLY........................................................................................................4437 Washer Nozzle Adjustment............................................................................................4437 Washer Tube Layout..................................................................................................4439 Removal and Installation of Front Washer Nozzle.....................................................................4439 Removal and Installation of Front Washer Tube Joint.................................................................4439 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4439 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4439 Inspection of Washer Nozzle.........................................................................................4439 CHECK VALVE.....................................................................................................4439 Removal and Installation of Front Wiper and Washer Switch...........................................................4440 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4440 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4440 Removal and Installation of Washer Tank.............................................................................4440 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4440 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4441 Removal and Installation of Washer Pump.............................................................................4441 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4441 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4441 REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM............................................................................................4442 Component Parts and Harness Connector Location......................................................................4442 System Description..................................................................................................4442 REAR WIPER OPERATION............................................................................................4442 INTERMITTENT OPERATION..........................................................................................4443 AUTO STOP OPERATION.............................................................................................4443 WASHER OPERATION................................................................................................4443 BCM WIPER SWITCH READING FUNCTION...............................................................................4443 Wiring Diagram — WIP/ R —...........................................................................................4444 Terminals and Reference Values for BCM..............................................................................4446 How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis...............................................................................4448 Preliminary Check...................................................................................................4448 CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT...........................................................................4448 CONSULT-II Functions (BCM)..........................................................................................4449 CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION......................................................................................4449 DATA MONITOR....................................................................................................4449 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4449 Display Item List...........................................................................................4449 ACTIVE TEST.....................................................................................................4449 Operation Procedure.........................................................................................4449 Display Item List...........................................................................................4450 Rear Wiper Does Not Operate.........................................................................................4450 Rear Wiper Does Not Return to Stop Position.........................................................................4451 Only Rear Wiper ON Does Not Operate.................................................................................4452 Only Rear Wiper INT Does Not Operate................................................................................4452 Wiper Does Not Wipe When Rear Washer Operates.......................................................................4452 Rear Wipers Do Not Stop.............................................................................................4453 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Arm, Adjustment of Wiper Arms Stop Location..................................4454 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4454 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4454 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Motor........................................................................4454 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4455 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4455 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper Blade........................................................................4455 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4455 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4455 Washer Nozzle Adjustment............................................................................................4456 Removal and Installation of Washer Nozzle...........................................................................4456 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4456 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4456 Washer Tube Layout..................................................................................................4457 Check Valve.........................................................................................................4457 Removal and Installation of Rear Wiper and Washer Switch............................................................4457 Removal and Installation of Washer Tank.............................................................................4457 Removal and Installation of Washer pump.............................................................................4457 POWER SOCKET............................................................................................................4458 Wiring Diagram — P/SCKT —...........................................................................................4458 Removal and Installation of Front Power Socket – 1..................................................................4459 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4459 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4459 Removal and Installation of Front Power Socket – 2..................................................................4459 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4459 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4459 Removal and Installation of Rear Power Socket.......................................................................4459 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4459 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4459 Removal and Installation of Luggage Room Power Socket...............................................................4460 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4460 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4460 HORN....................................................................................................................4461 Wiring Diagram — HORN —.............................................................................................4461 Removal and Installation............................................................................................4462 REMOVAL.........................................................................................................4462 INSTALLATION....................................................................................................4462 POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT............................................................................................ 2 ELECTRICAL UNITS........................................................................................................ 74 SUPER MULTIPLE JUNCTION (SMJ)........................................................................................... 76 FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)......................................................................................... 80 FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX........................................................................................ 81
VIDEO PREVIEW OF THE MANUAL:
PLEASE NOTE:
- This is the SAME MANUAL used by the dealerships to diagnose your vehicle
- No waiting for couriers / posts as this is a PDF manual and you can download it within 2 minutes time once you make the payment.
- Your payment is all safe and the delivery of the manual is INSTANT – You will be taken to the DOWNLOAD PAGE.
- So have no hesitations whatsoever and write to us about any queries you may have : heydownloadss @gmail.com
S.V
